Compare commits

...
901 Commits
Author SHA1 Message Date
Akshay Joshi 28555b387f Update version for release 2019-03-04 17:35:55 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 9ad8756ec2 Update message catalogs. 2019-03-04 17:30:42 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi 98815af8b6 Fix the position of text editor of a cell in Query Tool. 2019-03-04 16:39:30 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 0aeb20ee64 Prevent auto-commit/rollback being changed mid-transaction, and make the Preferences the defaults, not the current values. 2019-03-04 10:44:31 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi efeb9d6d20 Fix regression issue caused due to encoding fixes. 2019-03-04 16:11:20 +05:30
Abhilasha Narendra 9d96d6123e Update documentation screenshots as per new design. Fixes #3890 2019-03-04 13:06:04 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala 36ffdb93e8 Custom-encode forward slashes in URL parameters as Apache HTTPD doesn't allow them in some cases. Fixes #3998 2019-03-01 14:55:25 +00:00
Dave Page ecbba79c2a Fix PEP-8 issue. 2019-03-01 14:19:08 +00:00
Dave Page 13f52ad9ac Update release notes. 2019-03-01 13:54:11 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 849e34c2f7 Add full support and testsfor all PG server side encodings. Fixes #3992. Fixes #3982. Fixes #3911 2019-03-01 13:51:50 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala fb747b8031 Fix download CSV for IE11 which doesn't support the download attribute. Fixes #4040 2019-03-01 13:32:40 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi c6d295727c Fix resizing of the results grid, when full of data. 2019-03-01 12:49:41 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 74cfeabd02 Fix graphical explain now that JSON data is sent as text to stop JS futzing with it. Fixes #4041 2019-03-01 12:38:57 +00:00
Dave Page d8f9e3e87b Optimise the Docker file to minimise the number of layers and maximise the chances that changes will be in the last layers built. 2019-03-01 12:29:05 +00:00
Dave Page f552519ed6 Set the Gunicorn worker timeout to match the configured session expiry. Partially fixes #3656 2019-03-01 11:55:17 +00:00
Akshay Joshi bbeb395beb Ignore exceptions in the logger. Fixes #3933 2019-02-28 13:22:12 +00:00
Dave Page acb61f0990 Use POST instead of GET for Query Tool downloads to avoid errors with long queries. Fixes #4013 2019-02-27 17:08:53 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal e6e7cf0f69 Fix support for bigint's in JSONB data. Fixes #3587 2019-02-27 13:39:47 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 6b3a628e7a Fix double scrollbar on the query tool results grid. 2019-02-27 10:59:58 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 9c5b9364b6 Support double-click on Query Tool result grid column resize handles to auto-size to the content. Fixes #4034 2019-02-26 13:44:16 +00:00
Dave Page 1770c94b07 Fix the text highlight colour. 2019-02-25 17:08:05 +00:00
Dave Page 0694f59e70 Fix formatting 2019-02-25 12:51:50 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 98bfbcff8f Fix dashboard test cases. 2019-02-25 12:27:15 +00:00
Dave Page 42aa4dcd22 Clarify pgAgent installation options. 2019-02-25 12:10:53 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 59446bb4b5 Ensure JSON data isn't modified in-flight by psycopg2 when using View/Edit data. Fixes #3600 2019-02-25 10:34:36 +00:00
Akshay Joshi a5d39003b6 Handle display of roles with expiration set to infinity correctly. Fixes #3352 2019-02-25 10:24:11 +00:00
Dave Page c45675e019 Ensure long queries don't cause errors when downloading CSV in the Query Tool. Fixes #4013
This was actually fixed by #3673 it would appear.
2019-02-22 16:29:45 +00:00
Dave Page 27d3990ba2 Allow editing of values in columns with the oid datatype which are not an actual row OID. Fixes #3418 2019-02-22 16:18:39 +00:00
Dave Page d326ddd21a Update release notes as the fix for #3583 appears to have resolved other issues. Fixes #4000 2019-02-22 15:44:14 +00:00
Dave Page 3ad606733a Update doc colours to more closely match the new UI. 2019-02-22 15:22:50 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 38b034ec3c Add Commit and Rollback buttons to the Query Tool. Fixes #2418 2019-02-22 14:28:05 +00:00
Dave Page 0766b17726 Enable/disable the Download button with the Execute button. 2019-02-22 09:34:48 +00:00
Dave Page 73b144c45c Fix an issue where importing servers fails if a group already exists for a different user. Fixes #4022 2019-02-21 15:40:37 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 98283c1213 Disable the editor and execute functions whilst queries are executing. Fixes #4021 2019-02-21 14:19:25 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 5be0d17df5 Don't exclude SELECT statements from transaction management in the Query Tool in case they call data-modifying functions. Fixes #3958 2019-02-21 14:05:10 +00:00
Dave Page bacb57086c Update CodeMirror to 5.43.0 to resolve issues with auto-indent. Fixes #3583 2019-02-21 10:57:44 +00:00
Dave Page e5598038fa Ensure size stats are prettified on the statistics tab when the UI language != English. Fixes #3096 2019-02-20 16:39:38 +00:00
Dave Page a39f43788b Include multiple versions of the PG utilties in containers. Fixes #3886 2019-02-20 15:17:16 +00:00
Dave Page aae49b5324 Update Docker README to match reality. 2019-02-20 14:51:36 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 34045efb38 Modify the Download as CSV option to use the same connection as the Query Tool its running in so temporary tables etc. can be used. Fixes #3673 2019-02-20 11:49:45 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 292ac32db5 Fix editing of table data with a JSON primary key. Fixes #3912 2019-02-20 11:15:39 +00:00
Neel Patel ccb0796317 Convert the JSON output from yarn properly 2019-02-19 13:18:37 +00:00
Dave Page 841af6868d Fix paste issue during commit :-s 2019-02-18 17:08:18 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala e2482d2294 Set the background colour for backform notes, and add an icon. Fixes #3948 2019-02-18 16:59:39 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 554455fa75 Fix treeview state saving after reset. 2019-02-18 13:15:22 +00:00
Dave Page 255afe673a Add a "scratch pad" to the Query Tool to hold text snippets whilst editing. Fixes #2233 2019-02-15 15:44:49 +00:00
Dave Page c64373435b Make the Query Tool tab titles more concise and useful. Fixes #3544 2019-02-15 15:09:49 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 622b67684d Optimise display of Dependencies and Dependents, and use on-demand loading of rows in batches of 100. Fixes #3959 2019-02-14 11:15:01 +00:00
Dave Page e5e154e268 PEP-8 fix 2019-02-14 09:22:22 +00:00
Dave Page 122336eb63 Update release notes. 2019-02-14 09:19:36 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 17694ab467 Automatically expand child nodes as well as the selected node on the treeview if there is only one. Fixes #3559
This also ensure the browser state is cleared if the save interval is set to -1.
2019-02-14 09:18:08 +00:00
Dave Page 438116c574 Update Alpine Linux version in the docker container. This also updates the PG utilities to v11. Fixes #3991 2019-02-13 17:18:14 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 944cc55df7 Prevent an error when closing the Sort/Filter dialogue with an empty filter string. Fixes #3970 2019-02-13 16:44:57 +00:00
Dave Page 6af8efb5b1 You can't change colours in Preferences. Fixes #2990 2019-02-13 11:07:47 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 1f43b05c2a Fix alignment of checkbox to drop multiple schedules of pgAgent job. Fixes #3946 2019-02-13 14:55:52 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 10ee75bb1f Fix alignment of Close and Maximize button of Grant Wizard. Fixes #3906 2019-02-13 13:13:07 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 0aa93ac3ba Fix alignment of Connection type toggle switch of pgagent. Fixes #3974 2019-02-13 13:03:44 +05:30
Dave Page f72dcc23ea Allow X-FRAME-OPTIONS to be set in config.py. Default to SAMEORIGIN. Fixes #3439
DENY cannot be supported without breaking the debugger and query tool.
2019-02-12 16:17:14 +00:00
Dave Page 1fc66406f5 Don't embed docs and external sites in iframes, to allow the external sites to set X-FRAME-OPTIONS = DENY for security. Fxies #3985 2019-02-12 16:07:38 +00:00
Dave Page e0e7d6f1f6 Install a script to start pgAdmin (pgadmin4) from the command line when installed from the Python wheel. Fixes #1825 2019-02-12 14:04:45 +00:00
Dave Page 7f3e5c95c6 Add a missing bug fix. 2019-02-11 15:45:13 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 399d490342 Fix context sub-menu alignment on Safari. Fixes #3873 2019-02-11 13:38:11 +00:00
Ashesh Vashi c411520d98 Increase table header vertical padding to make headers more distinguished. 2019-02-11 10:58:19 +00:00
Dave Page 3d202dceeb Fix header. 2019-02-08 15:14:07 +00:00
Dave Page 23f36c5a41 Fix header. 2019-02-08 15:13:38 +00:00
Dave Page 6db4cfd9f1 Update libraries.txt, generated automatically using tools/dependency_inventory.py 2019-02-08 15:11:45 +00:00
Dave Page 9c3da10eea Python 2.7 fixes. 2019-02-08 15:06:38 +00:00
Dave Page a4cd2fe6c6 Add a script for auto-generating the library.txt file. 2019-02-08 14:48:59 +00:00
Ashesh Vashi eb3d3980e0 Use 'set_config(...)' function to update the 'bytea_output' settings
instead of 'UPDATE' statement, which is not allowed in the the read-only
instances.

Reported by: Robert J. Rotter
Solution provided by: Tom Lane

Fixes #3973
2019-02-08 10:18:32 +05:30
Cyril Jouve 28ce485cd2 requirements.txt simplifications. 2019-02-07 10:34:07 +00:00
Cyril Jouve a1ce6d9513 Remove another Python 2.6 hack 2019-02-07 10:32:40 +00:00
Ashesh Vashi 8efdc43177 Removing the font smoothing for the firefox as per feedback from Chethana 2019-02-07 15:30:55 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 8c65608946 Adding font-smoothing CSS for the OSX for making the fonts more
eye-pleasing and softer to match it with the proposed design.
2019-02-07 15:21:55 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 22d458b01e Close connections gracefully when the user logs out of pgAdmin. Fixes #3942 2019-02-06 13:17:52 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 0cc37de404 Added release_notes_4_3 to the toctree for the documentation. 2019-02-06 17:03:56 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 8f4d1f14f2 1) Fix alignment of import/export toggle switch. Fixes #3963
2) Remove unnecessary options for toggle switch which are already the default options.
2019-02-06 16:49:36 +05:30
Dave Page c888b282ea Update libraries.txt 2019-02-06 10:11:16 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 4a75053514 Clean up the unwanted extended versions of Backform Switch controls.
The Bootstrap Switch Control was extended only for alignment in most
places. IIntroduce a configurable option to set the necessary class
on the main div and also remove the extra extended controls.
2019-02-05 16:22:35 +00:00
Fred Escallier 3fae181c27 Update French translation. 2019-02-05 16:13:15 +00:00
Identifier Anonymous c6ba8899d1 Update Japanese translation. 2019-02-05 16:10:48 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 9a758f8fd3 Update version for release. 2019-02-04 18:04:33 +05:30
Akshay Joshi bb25d1a986 Update message catalogs 2019-02-04 17:59:28 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal d2ee5c4e82 1) Fixed jasmine test cases.
2) Bootstarp4 toggle size should be mini for triggers
2019-02-04 17:43:19 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 605b1f4799 Fixed API test case for dashboard graphs. 2019-02-04 16:36:16 +05:30
Navnath Gadakh 5fdc1ffb38 Exclude HTTPExceptions from the all_exception_handler as they should be returned as-is. Fixes #3961 2019-02-04 10:31:47 +00:00
Dave Page 9c21c07fc4 Correct error message. 2019-02-04 10:23:43 +00:00
Akshay Joshi da83c3d1b8 Added 'pga4dash' comment for consistency 2019-02-04 15:51:07 +05:30
Dave Page 9df89f9bd5 There are no new features in 4.1 or 4.2, just fixes and optimisations. 2019-02-04 10:10:53 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal aad7830d37 Dashboard graph optimization. Fixes #3941 2019-02-04 15:39:47 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi dae8186c2a Replace Bootstrap switch with Bootstrap4 toggle to improve the performance. Fixes #3051 2019-02-04 11:31:48 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 93234c86b7 Fix alignment of submenu for Internet Explorer. Fixes #3932 2019-02-01 17:55:38 +05:30
Cyril Jouve b786c4c140 Replace the PyCrypto module with the cryptography module. Fixes #3272 2019-01-31 15:57:27 +01:00
Dave Page cbfa614cf9 Ensure we use PIP 18.1 in the Docker build because of https://github.com/pypa/pip/issues/6197 2019-01-31 14:28:20 +01:00
Diego Augusto Molina da3b3de397 Expose the bind address in the Docker container via PGADMIN_BIND_ADDRESS. Fixes #3955 2019-01-31 14:26:35 +01:00
Cyril Jouve cbd8f8236a Remove Python 2.6 code that's now obsolete. Fixes #3935 2019-01-31 13:47:56 +01:00
Ashesh Vashi 38feacd04d Remove hacky way to open/close the dropdown submenu 2019-01-31 17:49:41 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi 6244463ac1 Fixed Statistics panel hang issue for 1000+ tables. Fixes #3664 2019-01-31 14:47:29 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 2afa3d8267 Remove icon for 'Refresh View' context menu of Materialized View and Added label for Definition control for consistency. 2019-01-31 13:20:44 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi 3b35aaa1d7 Fixed unable to drop multiple Rules and Foreign Tables from properties tab. Fixes #3899 2019-01-31 13:03:37 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 1bce0b5eef Update yarn lockfile. 2019-01-31 12:24:07 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 0bb4f005e5 Correct schema should be displayed in Materialized View dialog. Fixes #3916 2019-01-31 11:29:18 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala 317a04eafc Handle backend errors properly and display them correctly on GUI for Grant Wizard 2019-01-30 16:39:34 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 0e489df7b0 Fixed debugger issue for procedure inside package for EPAS servers. Fixes #3927 2019-01-30 14:48:58 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal ab094e8f16 Increase frames splitter mouse hover area to make it easier to resize. Fixes #3865 2019-01-30 14:26:36 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 430be1c4cb Increase the width, and show the pointer cursor of the button under the
sortable backgrid header
2019-01-30 11:55:35 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 0e8f804279 Show the help string separate block in the calendar control to align the
input, and calendar button properly in case of help string is present.
2019-01-30 11:42:38 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 1858596253 Override the font-family defined by bootstrap 2019-01-30 10:21:36 +05:30
Akshay Joshi fedbcd4045 Ensure that output of the query should be displayed even if Data Output window is detached from the Query Tool. Fixes #3697 2019-01-29 18:48:21 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 821496dc84 Fixed Query Tool Initialization Error. Fixes #3903 2019-01-29 11:45:31 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala 07f16f40cd Ensure that grant wizard should list down functions for EPAS server running with no-redwood-compat mode. Fixes #3935 2019-01-28 12:47:27 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala 2d7eaa63c4 Fix alignment of help messages in properties panels. Fixes #3929 2019-01-24 16:39:55 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala d9fc9fdc4d Ensure object names in external process dialogues are properly escaped. Fixes #3872 2019-01-24 16:34:18 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 42c7ae372f Fixed dialog tab navigation for Backup and Restore dialog. Fixes regression of #3862 2019-01-24 17:15:12 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi d4fe31404c Fix syntax error on python 2.7 for the feature test. 2019-01-24 11:25:00 +05:30
Akshay Joshi f316e0533e 1) Messages tab of query tool should be clear on subsequent execution of table/view using View/Edit Data. Fixes #3608
2) Clear drop-down menu should be disabled for View/Edit Data. Fixes #3609
2019-01-23 18:25:33 +05:30
Dave Page 08cf2c8310 Ensure we set the fixed port options properly when configuring following an error. 2019-01-23 12:12:16 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 406ada10f5 Fixed EXEC script for procedures. Fixes #3850 2019-01-23 14:44:24 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 1f29859040 Improve application level exception handling for unhandled exceptions. 2019-01-23 12:49:05 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal fcfe0929d3 Ensure that browser should warn before close or refresh. Fixes #3849 2019-01-23 11:57:36 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala e27c2c421e Update chromedriver. 2019-01-22 16:11:01 +00:00
Diego Augusto Molina d92368f8e5 Use 'UPDATE pg_settings' for setting bytea_output as a
convenience hack for those running on old, unsupported versions of
PostgreSQL 'cos we're nice like that.
2019-01-22 15:56:29 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 11ab1918ea Fixed domain sql regression test for EPAS 2019-01-22 18:22:16 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi c6bae69b6f Proper SQL should be generated when create domain of type interval with precision. Fixes #3853 2019-01-22 17:53:36 +05:30
Harshal Dhumal ea87d6da8f Fixed keyboard navigation for Select2 and Privilege cell in Backgrid Fixes #3908 2019-01-22 16:35:57 +05:30
Harshal Dhumal f731ab730b Fixed keyboard navigation for dialog tabs. Fixes #3862 2019-01-22 16:28:32 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 3e7381414f Drop-down should be closed when click on any other toolbar button. Fixes #3858 2019-01-22 16:05:02 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala cd311ca8a9 Remove session from the grid on the dashboard when it is terminated. 2019-01-22 14:25:11 +05:30
Ganesh Jaybhay a0d2c45361 1. Proper alignment of help message with date time control.
2. Added help-block class for helpMessageClassName.
2019-01-22 11:22:32 +05:30
Nozomi Anzai 407f885559 Updated Japanese translation. 2019-01-21 16:54:41 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 6fc2e032f3 Fixed alignment of tree arrow icons for Internet Explorer. Fixes #3871 2019-01-21 17:40:05 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi 3ffeb4be45 Ensure that database restriction of server dialog should work with special characters. Fixes #3800 2019-01-21 17:24:46 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal a9794d8ab4 Ensure that file format combo box value should not retained when hidden files checkbox is toggled. Fixes #3840 2019-01-21 16:22:59 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi aedb3997b0 Ensure that Backup/Restore button should work on single click. Fixes #3811 2019-01-21 15:27:55 +05:30
Akshay Joshi c7cbe0ff4a Data should be updated properly for FTS Configurations, FTS Dictionaries, FTS Parsers and FTS Templates. Fixes #3897 2019-01-21 14:36:39 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 27cdb835cb Correct order of Save and Cancel button for json/jsonb editing. Fixes #3891 2019-01-18 18:14:50 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 06ae799d02 Handle text wrapping in alertify dialog only when it is required. Regression of #3695 2019-01-18 17:54:49 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 69f6895224 Proper SQL should be generated when create function with return type as custom type argument. Fixes #3774 2019-01-18 15:11:35 +05:30
Akshay Joshi a163edec7a Inline edbspl trigger functions should not be visible in Grant Wizard. Fixes #3740 2019-01-17 18:37:36 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 48660508ce Fixed controls alignment responsiveness to docker size change. 2019-01-17 18:20:12 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal f779378e8a Add right border on selected tree item. 2019-01-17 13:27:07 +05:30
Akshay Joshi c1aba3e055 1) Proper SQL should be generated when creating/changing column with custom type argument. Fixes #3838
2) Proper SQL should be generated when create procedure with custom type arguments. Fixes #3846
2019-01-17 13:13:15 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 6bbcaf6b27 Fixed SQL for when clause while creating Trigger. Fixes #3837 2019-01-16 14:46:34 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal dec43d98dc Fixed execution time to show Hours part for long running queries in Query Tool. Fixes #3475 2019-01-16 12:57:52 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal d7b0508305 Fixed SQL for foreign table options. Fixes #3453 2019-01-16 12:34:16 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 7ac4e2a9d9 Fixed following issues:
- Process watcher made fixed width with header changes, time details rounded to 2 decimals
 - Query history will show "No query history" if no query fired. Query editor default size increased.
 - Fixed a bug where New folder create button not working when in List mode and No files/folder present.
 - Other minor improvements.
2019-01-16 11:55:08 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 2a359d9d77 Proper error should be thrown when server group is created with existing name. Fixes #3693 2019-01-15 18:38:01 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 7b0c81126c Ensure long string should be wrap in alertify dialogs. Fixes #3695 2019-01-15 18:23:59 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 6735c30292 Define some of the variables in _default.variables.scss with '!default'
suffix to allow override them while defining another theme.
2019-01-15 13:01:16 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 1f082a0488 Fixed a typo in the wizard.js, which was not allowing to show the
maximize button in the Grant Wizard.

Also - change the CSS to set the top to '0' of the ajs-content (alertify
content container) for the frameless dialogs.
2019-01-15 12:59:13 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 8b135f2932 Update message catalog and version for release. 2019-01-11 23:34:24 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal d4a2f1b8cd Ensure that last row of table data should be visible and user will be able to add new row. Fixes #3866 2019-01-11 23:25:05 +05:30
Dave Page 14f462e9dc Fix PEP-8 issues. 2019-01-11 22:13:17 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal d641b47adb Make the browser more robust in the face of multibyte characters in SQL_ASCII databases. Fixes #3877 2019-01-11 21:55:49 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 252e05ef29 Fix SQL generated for tables with inherited columns. Fixes #3505 2019-01-11 21:50:02 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 8fb340d23b Fix ordering of VACUUM options which changed in PG11. Fixes #3836
While we're at it, fix the JSON handling in the maintenance/backup/restore routes.
2019-01-10 15:29:55 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal a8167f0a72 Fix Jasmine tests. 2019-01-10 15:02:51 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal f7fa18f827 Ensure the context menu works after a server is renamed. Fixes #3575 2019-01-10 11:52:52 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 01b87d4834 Don't show system catalogs in the schemas property list unless show system objects is enabled. Fixes #3842 2019-01-10 11:41:09 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 868622912e Fix help for the backup/restore dialogues. Fixes #3861 2019-01-10 11:20:42 +05:30
Fred Escallier 6d0c4bc116 Updated French translation 2019-01-08 17:18:38 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 3c7742f3b2 Fixed an issue while creating export job. Fixes #3856 2019-01-08 13:02:29 +05:30
Dave Page 11870006c3 Correct dashboard title. 2019-01-07 18:02:22 +05:30
Akshay Joshi ea514115c3 Update the release note version in toctree 2019-01-07 16:34:25 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 561ee7556f Update version for release 2019-01-07 16:14:58 +05:30
Akshay Joshi e2857332b7 Update message catalogs 2019-01-07 16:09:25 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal d361e604c1 Further style tweaks. 2019-01-07 16:03:54 +05:30
Dave Page 419bb7f995 Include rtf files in the copyright updater. 2019-01-07 14:38:12 +05:30
Dave Page 365cbc34f5 Fix MacOS package copyright. 2019-01-07 14:37:43 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal e9ba2e036a Further style tweaks. 2019-01-07 14:24:44 +05:30
Dave Page c5d49bd862 Fix copyright year. 2019-01-07 11:28:39 +05:30
Identifier Anonymous 23b649fbd1 Update Japanese translation. 2019-01-04 16:17:43 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi ce1c06d7f1 Ensure we display the relation name (and not the OID) in the locks table wherever possible. Fixes #3702
Note that at the server level we fetch the data from pg_locks in the maintenance database,
so it can not fetch the pg_class relation for tables in other databasess (relation::regclass).
2019-01-04 14:45:28 +00:00
Dave Page fb02f8b1be Update release notes. 2019-01-04 13:11:20 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 4e27bf989f Display event trigger functions correctly on EPAS. Fixes #3549 2019-01-04 13:06:45 +00:00
Dave Page b5c7a108ab Put the appname back how it should be! 2019-01-04 10:54:35 +00:00
Dave Page d6778aa915 Bump version prior to 4.0 2019-01-04 10:53:10 +00:00
Dave Page 7d2ab6a685 Fix copyright notice. 2019-01-04 10:52:54 +00:00
Dave Page 7f40444087 Update WSGI instructions for Windows for Python 3. Fixes #3847. Patch from Benjamin Hayes. 2019-01-04 09:54:24 +00:00
Dave Page ad56e7fb12 Update message catalogs 2019-01-03 15:27:36 +00:00
Dave Page 598f69b63d Improve wording. 2019-01-03 15:24:47 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 7d765fea04 Further styling fixes. 2019-01-03 14:50:24 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 1283c22bb9 Fix a webpack issue that could cause the Query Tool to fail to render. Fixes #3679 2019-01-03 14:43:45 +00:00
Dave Page 2817ec438a Convert batch file line endings in an attempt to end the insanity of missing labels. 2019-01-03 14:33:43 +00:00
Akshay Joshi c455dda3ce Ensure auto complete should works for columns from a schema-qualified table. Fixes #3810 2019-01-03 18:59:57 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 3a130d68c5 Ensure auto complete should works when first identifier in the FROM clause needs quoting. Fixes #3809 2019-01-03 17:22:42 +05:30
Dave Page 6a9406237a Update yarn lockfile. 2019-01-02 12:57:21 +00:00
Dave Page d7da8be486 Make the upgrade check key configurable. 2019-01-02 12:56:39 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 6e5b54eb1a Increase default startup timeout and give progressive messages when things are slow. 2019-01-02 11:57:33 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala e23d307c56 Update copyright notices for 2019 2019-01-02 15:54:12 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 86ecf9c84e Fixed following:
- Base font size changed from 0.815rem to 0.875rem, for navbar from 0.875rem to 0.925rem.
- Dialog sizes made consistent throughout the application. Now there are 3 size options for width and height each - sm, md, lg. Combination of any of these to be used hereafter
- Alignment fix for controls of Node properties dialogs which includes showing text and label in one line without dialog size change, checkbox alignment, switch control alignment at places and other minor improvements in other dialogs
- Error message design change in dialogs validation
- SQL Editor data grid editor popup design changes which were missed
- Design change for dashboard server activity grid
- Login page language dropdown color fix
- Properties accordion collapse design fix
- Help, Info icon fixed across all dialogs which were not working if clicked exactly on the text
- Added missing icon with buttons at few places
- Shadow behind the dialogs is increased to make it look clearly separated and depth.
- Control Alignment fix in maintenance dialog
- Min height of alertify dialogs set for better UX
- File dialog design fix when no files found
- Grant wizard fixes - Scroll bar visibility on first page, use full space for SQL generated on the last page
- Browser toolbar buttons changed to sync with SQL editor toolbar buttons
- Rounded corners for docker floating dialog (no properties)
- Renaming file in file dialog should show original file name
- SQL data grid text edit popup buttons behaviour was swapped. This is fixed.
- Import/Export dialog changes as per new design.
2019-01-02 15:07:59 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 1b9c841c15 pgBrowser tree does not need to save tree state, when 'browser' module
is initialized from the tools like query editor, debugger, etc.

Refs #3559
2019-01-02 10:48:13 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 41c028f944 Ensure that null values handled properly in CSV download. Fixes #3780 2019-01-01 15:15:36 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 5799ac14ba Improvement in the look and feel of the whole application
Changed the SCSS/CSS for the below third party libraries to adopt the
new look 'n' feel:
- wcDocker
- Alertify dialogs, and notifications
- AciTree
- Bootstrap Navbar
- Bootstrap Tabs
- Bootstrap Drop-Down menu
- Backgrid
- Select2

Adopated the new the look 'n' feel for the dialogs, wizard, properties,
tab panels, tabs, fieldset, subnode control, spinner control, HTML
table, and other form controls.

- Font is changed to Roboto
- Using SCSS variables to define the look 'n' feel
- Designer background images for the Login, and Forget password pages in
  'web' mode
- Improved the look 'n' feel for the key selection in the preferences
  dialog
- Table classes consistency changes across the application
- File Open and Save dialog list view changes

Author(s): Aditya Toshniwal & Khushboo Vashi
2018-12-21 17:14:55 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi a000dc6f60 Further improvements to treeview restoration. Fixes #3559 2018-12-21 11:36:11 +00:00
Dave Page 12b7e03085 Add flask-migrate to the container doc build as it's now required. 2018-12-21 10:58:15 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 943fc25f60 Make the setup process more robust against aborted executions. Fixes #3830 2018-12-21 10:30:49 +00:00
Dave Page f62d35bf3c Don't lose the comma! 2018-12-20 11:03:54 +00:00
Dave Page e2df00fc05 Use the standard copyright string. 2018-12-20 10:58:31 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 36db047071 Add a copyright update tool. 2018-12-20 10:54:54 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal ffae65bdbe Ensure table definitions include WHERE clauses on EXCLUDE constraints. Fixes #3726 2018-12-20 10:19:54 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi d14fb85fff Tweak the wording on the Grant Wizard. Fixes #3796 2018-12-20 10:17:00 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 13dbfff11d Ensure identifiers are properly displayed in the plan viewer. Fixes #3821 2018-12-20 10:09:11 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala ed01dbd0ef Ensure the dashboard tabs are styles correctly. Fixes #3824 2018-12-20 09:53:35 +00:00
Dave Page cb880678cc Python 2.6 support is officially deprecated. 2018-12-20 09:15:26 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 7515e08578 Fix an issue when user define Cast from smallint->text is created. Fixes #3753 2018-12-19 18:02:04 +05:30
Akshay Joshi c973c3387e Include the WHERE clause on EXCLUDE constraints in RE-SQL. Fixes #3726 2018-12-18 13:37:04 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 72ba5bdaee Fix drop/drop cascade regression. Fixes #3823 2018-12-18 09:45:06 +00:00
Dave Page 62bb3ca097 Correct bug number, per Khushboo. 2018-12-13 11:51:57 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi e666b0fab0 Fix an issue that could cause the Query Tool to fail to render. Fixes #3433 2018-12-13 11:15:55 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi dfbb2212c0 Prevent attempts to bulk-drop schema objects. Fixes #3797 2018-12-13 11:03:30 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 52fb8e197f Increase the size of the resize handle of the edit grid text pop-out. Fixes #3083
Allow horizontal sizing of the edit grid text pop-out. Fixes #3805
2018-12-13 10:56:45 +00:00
Dave Page d68eede3e6 Allow query plans to be downloaded as SVG files. Fixes #3589 2018-12-13 10:49:56 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 04735e631e Minor bootstrap 4 fixes:
- Removed 'collapse in' css from wizard as we have 'collapse show' in Bootstrap-4
- Fixed 'Select/Unselect All' button layout for Select2 control used in pgAgent.
2018-12-13 10:28:58 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 90b2d2e536 Update release notes. 2018-12-10 15:07:27 +05:30
Dave Page 3448465e82 Defione Q_NULLPTR for Qt 4. 2018-12-06 11:08:17 +00:00
Dave Page 72a2db53c3 Use Q_NULLPTR instead of nullptr as some of our older build machines don't support C++ 11. 2018-12-06 10:40:49 +00:00
Dave Page 5cfe0ef115 Use C++ style casts. 2018-12-06 10:36:57 +00:00
Dave Page 312bcbc83f Use nullptr instead of NULL or 0. 2018-12-06 10:30:07 +00:00
Dave Page 566ff7b609 Use nullptr instead of NULL or 0. 2018-12-06 10:24:52 +00:00
Dave Page 45cd17af84 Use nullptr instead of NULL or 0. 2018-12-06 10:17:47 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 12ef55334b Fix encoding test for older Python versions. 2018-12-06 10:15:58 +00:00
Dave Page f2773354c8 Remove blank messages from the Qt project file as they don't work on newer versions of QMake and aren't needed anyway. 2018-12-06 09:50:21 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 431516ad61 Ensure the browser toolbar buttons work in languages other than English. Fixes #3798 2018-12-06 09:25:15 +00:00
Dave Page 1141930178 Allow servers to be pre-loaded into container deployments. Fixes #3801 2018-12-05 17:16:46 +00:00
Dave Page 55402ec7d9 Run Postfix in the container build so passwords can be reset etc. Fixes #3599 2018-12-05 14:44:23 +00:00
Dave Page 980d1e0292 Fix PEP8 issue. 2018-12-04 17:07:41 +00:00
Dave Page 739864c7d1 Update release notes. 2018-12-04 17:04:27 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 7e3bd8b88a Fix an encoding issue in the query tool. Fixes #3711 2018-12-04 17:03:19 +00:00
Dave Page 6428ffcdaf Fix a minor CSS issue in the file dialogue's upload panel. 2018-12-04 13:12:02 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 660293456c Don't use a hard coded server ID for mocking! 2018-12-04 13:07:35 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 0100997aab Hide Radio buttons that should not be shown on the maintenance dialogue. 2018-12-04 11:00:58 +00:00
Dave Page c80b91876a Remove file added in error. 2018-12-04 10:49:11 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala f4f0fa0e47 Fix utility route check for Windows. 2018-12-04 10:46:59 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 851c0cfff3 Ensure browser toolbar buttons are always shown. 2018-12-03 10:09:36 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 9a3047c89c Add API tests for utility check route. Fixes #3790 2018-11-30 09:56:41 +00:00
Akshay Joshi d801ed5008 Add titles to the code areas of the Query Tool and Debugger to ensure that panels can be re-docked within them. Fixes #3619 2018-11-29 15:47:48 +00:00
Akshay Joshi bdf9f3404f Fix handling of array types as inputs to the debugger. Fixes #3354 2018-11-27 11:18:47 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c79ac2f8d2 Fix some minor CSS issues. 2018-11-27 10:57:30 +00:00
Identifier Anonymous 63f7fbcf7d Update Japanese translation. 2018-11-27 10:54:01 +00:00
Fred Escallier d61fc8b8db Update French translation. 2018-11-27 10:52:01 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 527e084ef7 Bump version number for release 2018-11-26 15:35:26 +05:30
Akshay Joshi b6842e88ac Update message catalogs 2018-11-26 15:31:05 +05:30
Dave Page f0327f5219 Add the ability to import and export server definitions from a config database. Fixes #3772 2018-11-21 16:09:20 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 3cfc3366d7 Fixed the height and width of the Table dialog. 2018-11-21 18:41:03 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 05e067035f Prevent the debugger controls being pressed again before previous processing is complete. Fixes #3734
Note that this needs to be re-visited in the future, as the current fix is somewhat hacky.
2018-11-20 16:35:27 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 8b5abdfa8f Fix changes to the NOT NULL and default value options in the Table Dialogue. Fixes #3742 2018-11-20 16:29:20 +00:00
Dave Page 782b7419f6 Fix toggle breakpoints buttons in the debugger. Fixes #3736 2018-11-20 16:22:56 +00:00
Dave Page bbb8433af3 Don't double-list the connecting page in the index. 2018-11-19 13:55:18 +00:00
Akshay Joshi ef68cae1f1 Properly report errors when debugging cannot be started. Fixes #3723 2018-11-15 15:18:12 -05:00
Akshay Joshi 9b0889842d Fix dropping of multiple functions/procedures at once. Fixes #3746 2018-11-14 08:40:21 -05:00
Akshay Joshi eae18f6f14 Ensure previous notices are not removed from the Messages tab in the Query Tool if an error occurs during query execution. Fixes #3016 2018-11-14 08:27:47 -05:00
Dave Page 29ed7ec881 Fix standalone setup script execution. 2018-11-05 13:39:43 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 220fdf583e Allow use of 0 (integer) and empty strings as parameters in the debugger. Fixes #3629 2018-11-02 16:44:09 +00:00
Dave Page 628f0d254e Fix resource group multi-drop test. 2018-11-01 08:54:33 +00:00
Dave Page 7dde5d52d0 Fix regression test. 2018-10-31 12:18:13 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 95cda78bdb Remove some CSS for the body level that isn't required and may cause issues. 2018-10-31 12:13:13 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi e59eaedfd0 Fix buildfarm failures. 2018-10-31 11:35:13 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi f17979141c Add support for dropping multiple objects at once from the collection Properties panel. Fixes #1513 2018-10-31 10:30:37 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 3359a0de7a Allow the selection order to be preserved in the Select2 control to fix column ordering in data Import/Export. Fixes #3029 2018-10-31 10:09:40 +00:00
Identifier Anonymous 6e03775f05 Japanese translation update. 2018-10-31 09:52:49 +00:00
Akshay Joshi b58f288eec Fixed fatal error while launching the pgAdmin4 3.5. Update the version of the Flask to 0.12.4 for release. Fixes #3730 2018-10-31 13:36:43 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala 140372a5cf Fix minor alert layout issue on IE 11. 2018-10-30 09:27:14 +00:00
Akshay Joshi d97431cb4f Bump version number for release. 2018-10-29 22:29:07 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 1e14b0d068 Update message catalogs 2018-10-29 22:21:40 +05:30
Dave Page 4ff0fcdd82 Update to latest Flask, to avoid a security issue. 2018-10-29 14:17:30 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 696fbfb8b9 Fix CREATE Script functionality for EDB-Wrapped functions. Fixes #3676 2018-10-29 11:54:11 +00:00
Dave Page be47390baf Fix the Docker build. 2018-10-29 11:01:47 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 0d5a6eeeff Ensure that utility existence check should work for schema and
other child objects while taking Backup/Restore. Fixes #3722
2018-10-25 18:55:21 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 6ddab02769 1) Fixed process watcher status message when user has stopped the process.
2) Saved the process state in sqlite database.
2018-10-25 17:03:34 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 091aa62084 Fixed background colour while replacing a file in File Manager dialog. 2018-10-24 17:53:06 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 2058cdf662 Fixed test cases for Utilities when default_binary_path is not provided in test_config file. 2018-10-22 13:22:35 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 6bc6bc7f60 Ensure that Utilities(Backup/Restore/Maintenence/Import-Export) should not be started
if binary path is wrong and also added 'Stop Process' button to cancel the process.
2018-10-22 12:35:53 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 370df47042 Fixed issue where session files are not deleted first time when pgAdmin4 server started,
it always wait for CHECK_SESSION_FILES_INTERVAL which is 24 hours by default.
2018-10-18 18:02:45 +05:30
Usman Muzaffar 9ae49cbf31 Test case fixes for server mode. 2018-10-18 09:39:09 +01:00
Harshal Dhumal 822d384746 Purge connections from the cache on logout. Fixes #3703 2018-10-17 12:42:41 +01:00
Harshal Dhumal ce31726af5 Fix connection garbage collector. Fixes #3700 2018-10-17 12:35:45 +01:00
Dave Page 494a8ac3fe Release note update 2018-10-17 12:30:01 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 50738db2b8 Fix syntax error when creating new pgAgent schedules with a start
date/time and exception. Fixes #3638

- Fixed syntax error.
- Update/Delete exceptions are not working, SQL is wrong.
- Wrong exception time is shown, it should shown in UTC as datatype of
  the column is timestamp with out timezone.
- Added test cases for Schedule and Steps of pgAgent Job.
2018-10-17 12:28:31 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 6fa6939f52 Additional feature test fixes:
1) Changes required for working with Bootstrap 4.
2) Change to fix the timeout exception when waiting for element (tested multiple times on multiple server, did not occur to me thereafter)
3) Removed reset layout after each test case. Instead, delete the layout entry from sqlite db file and do a plain refresh. This will save some time and will also remove dependency on reset layout menu.
4) Disables tree state saving when feature test run starts. Feature tests got confused with auto expanding tree.
2018-10-17 11:50:22 +01:00
Akshay Joshi ef0e53e8fc Fixed pep8 issue 2018-10-15 17:41:21 +05:30
Akshay Joshi fd2c2c4ff7 Fixed minor issue in SQL autocomplete. 2018-10-15 17:36:11 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal d6c4911135 Fixed calender control issues with Bootstrap 4 2018-10-12 15:02:38 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 6991c06937 Additional Bootstrap 4 fixes:
- Calendar control
- Query Tool's Sort/Filter drop down
- Backform hidden controls
- Debugger toolbar
2018-10-11 13:23:59 +01:00
Usman Muzaffar 3f16a0c52c Log process exceptions using ASCII mode to avoid issues with string concatenation. 2018-10-11 13:13:08 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 4a6426d3e7 Doc updates after renaming SQL Editor section of the Preference panel. 2018-10-11 09:10:02 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 235a75202d Fixed minor issue in saving tree state logic. 2018-10-11 11:22:24 +05:30
Dave Page 55cf0cf2f9 Fix message. 2018-10-10 13:30:55 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 0565f8dd78 Update to use Bootstrap 3 instead of Bootstrap 4. Fixes #3562 2018-10-10 12:43:26 +01:00
Dave Page bdf90e67a7 When an execution is cancelled in query tool, two different messages are encountered at different time. There is no exact pattern for them. So now, the test case will look for any one of following message in the output text box
i) canceling statement due to user request
ii) Execution cancelled!
2018-10-10 11:23:14 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 7144db7f5a Cleanup session files periodically. Fixes #3674 2018-10-09 11:34:13 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c66840bc8e Fix some styling regressed in #2927. 2018-10-09 11:22:54 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 26ad6d4c5d Rename the 'SQL Editor' section of the Preferences to 'Query Tool' as it applies to the whole tool, not just the editor. Fixes #3660 2018-10-08 11:43:02 +01:00
Fred Escallier 87b64cf3c0 Update French translation. 2018-10-08 11:18:59 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 0f1651686b Code refactoring:
- Move the duplicate code for closing the background process dialog into 'test_gui_helper.py',
- Simplify the logic by removing the duplicate steps to insert/update binary paths for each server type from 'test_utils.py'.
2018-10-08 11:09:30 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 528ea88dec Save the treeview state periodically, and restore it automatically when reconnecting. Fixes #1253 2018-10-08 10:03:19 +01:00
Dave Page 44ef501283 Fix PEP-8 issue. 2018-10-03 10:12:00 +01:00
Usman Muzaffar eb27fa29b1 Test stabilisation, mostly for Windows. Fixes #3136 2018-10-03 10:03:35 +01:00
Identifier Anonymous a89ab88097 Updated Japanese translation. 2018-10-02 15:44:05 +01:00
Dave Page c092495b7a Bump version number for release. 2018-10-01 10:25:19 +01:00
Dave Page 8e2ede21a0 Update message catalogs 2018-10-01 10:23:23 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 15fe26a710 Fix handling of backslashes in the edit grid. Fixes #3551 2018-09-25 10:34:33 -04:00
Dave Page 530017809a Update supported Python versions to match reality. 2018-09-24 16:22:06 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 6c2c18106f Swap the Schema and Schemas icons and Catalog and Catalogs icons that had been used the wrong way around. 2018-09-24 14:11:23 -04:00
Aditya Toshniwal 1b20831338 Ensure changes to Query Tool settings from the Preferences dialogue are applied before executing queries. Fixes #3657 2018-09-19 16:50:11 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 6a46e43567 Ensure the runtime can startup properly if there are wide characters in the logfile path on Windows. Fixes #3464 2018-09-18 15:08:31 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 003889f15e Added null checks and some more startup logs for runtime 2018-09-17 15:16:48 +05:30
Dave Page a2258c83e9 Chance an update to Node 8. Let's see how Jenkins likes this. 2018-09-14 17:04:51 +01:00
Atle Frenvik Sveen 370d9c72ec Update some of the JS dependencies to ensure we can use Node 10. Fixes #3649 2018-09-14 16:55:13 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 026969e3d1 Add a startup logger to the runtime to aid with debugging. 2018-09-14 14:41:52 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 0ec3224212 Fix logic around validation and highlighting of Sort/Filter in the Query Tool. Fixes #3607 2018-09-14 14:18:43 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 38ddea038a Fix support for the CLOB datatype in EPAS. Fixes #3596 2018-09-13 13:45:06 +01:00
Akshay Joshi d6c64e8f11 Fixed issue where wrong menu id passed when click on 'View Data' tool button 2018-09-12 11:00:58 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 4010dc80a9 Ensure auto-complete works for objects in schemas other than public and pg_catalog. Fixes #3630 2018-09-11 12:56:14 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 9c5e42c7a6 Used SCSS variables instead of hardcoded value for color and moved code from CSS to SCSS file. 2018-09-11 11:18:37 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 532cbe216a Add shortcuts for View Data and the Query tool to the Browser header bar. Fixes #3564 2018-09-10 15:16:13 +01:00
Dave Page 1850a3a995 Remove unnecessary screenshot. 2018-09-10 13:17:59 +01:00
Usman Muzaffar 22776d2e14 Further stability fixes for the feature tests. 2018-09-10 13:15:55 +01:00
Dave Page 7f1b588c69 Remove package-lock.json to stop Yarn bleating. 2018-09-06 15:00:52 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 8f88443e15 Doc updates for optional data point markers and mouse-over tooltips to display values on graphs. Fixes #3514 2018-09-06 14:54:25 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal a74b9c96c1 Add optional data point markers and mouse-over tooltips to display values on graphs. Fixes #3514
Ensure queries are no longer executed when dashboards are closed. Fixes #3576
2018-09-05 17:25:11 +01:00
Fred Escallier 0e59be237b Update French translation (and rebuild the rest).
1779 of 1994 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1994 of 1994 messages (100%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1781 of 1994 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1405 of 1994 messages (70%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1449 of 1994 messages (72%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1782 of 1994 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ko/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1994 of 1994 messages (100%) translated in pgadmin/translations/fr/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1835 of 1994 messages (92%) translated in pgadmin/translations/es/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2018-09-05 17:08:29 +01:00
Identifier Anonymous 6a4689599d Update Japanese translation (and rebuild the rest).
1779 of 1994 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1994 of 1994 messages (100%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1781 of 1994 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1405 of 1994 messages (70%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1449 of 1994 messages (72%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1782 of 1994 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ko/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1903 of 1994 messages (95%) translated in pgadmin/translations/fr/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1835 of 1994 messages (92%) translated in pgadmin/translations/es/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2018-09-05 17:03:56 +01:00
Dave Page 6e54a13ba2 Update test cases to match style changes 2018-09-04 12:04:57 +01:00
Dave Page fa1cf7b7a3 Include the 3.4 release notes in the toctree. 2018-09-04 11:47:20 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 82c9cca683 Move all CSS into SCSS files for consistency and ease of colour maintenance etc. Fixes #2927 2018-09-04 11:24:51 +01:00
Dave Page 61f00a0cbb Update versions for 3.3. 2018-09-03 10:11:34 +01:00
Dave Page 43ccfd3af6 Update message catalogs 2018-09-03 10:09:10 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 09c388ecee Correct the documentation of View/Edit data. Fixes #3604 2018-08-31 19:02:26 +05:30
Xuri Gong 89e283fbc2 Add a geometry viewer that can render PostGIS data on a blank canvas or various map sources. Fixes #1407 2018-08-30 13:59:44 +01:00
Akshay Joshi b665f8fac8 Fixed auto complete issue for EPAS database server. 2018-08-30 12:30:00 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 283a69a21a Fix auto scrolling issue in debugger on step in and step out. Fixes #3554. 2018-08-29 18:20:45 +05:30
Harshal Dhumal 208ee4da8c Fixed debugger execution issues:
1. Allow debugging of EPAS package procedures/functions with INOUT params.
 2. Add support for indirect debugging for EPAS package procedures/functions.
 3. Allow debugging with NULL param values.
 4. Remove saved debug arguments.

Fixes #3191
2018-08-29 17:44:37 +05:30
Maxim Zakharov b7ad95907a When building the Windows installer, copy system Python packages before installing dependencies to ensure we don't end up with older versions than intended. Fixes #3579 2018-08-29 11:33:25 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 9c8cf26784 Ensure that refresh button on dashboard should refresh the table. Fixes #3525 2018-08-29 11:24:45 +05:30
Akshay Joshi dd3c7c94e6 Ensure external table node should be visible only for GPDB. Fixes #3548 2018-08-27 19:11:25 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal ea787b30eb Fixed auto complete issues for Python 2.6 2018-08-27 16:37:00 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 7a3f3046df Merge pgcli code with version 1.10.3, which is used for auto complete feature. 2018-08-27 15:00:56 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 25679fd542 Ensure sort/filter dialog should display proper message after losing database connection. Fixes #3561 2018-08-22 16:38:31 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala 0f17b4f738 Ensure 'select all' and 'unselect all' working properly for pgAgent schedule. Fixes #3313. 2018-08-22 15:13:40 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 0ab1305ddf 1. Added new backup/restore options for PostgreSQL 11. Fixes #3503
2. Ensure backup should work with '--data-only' and '--schema-only' for any format. Fixes #3347
3. Added supported "Dump Options" for "pg_dumpall" which was not there since pgAdmin 3.
4. Fixed issue where "--clean" should not clubbed with "--data-only" while taking backup.
5. Fixed "--oids" should not clubbed with "--inserts" or "--column-inserts" while taking backup.
2018-08-22 12:17:50 +05:30
Harshal Dhumal 013ad7446f Make the session thread safe.
As sessions in pgAdmin4 are filesystem based session, they need locking
for avoiding the access from multiple threads, specially running as an
WSGI application.

Fixes #3547
2018-08-22 11:58:27 +05:30
Usman Muzaffar 70c95fcdd5 Stabilise feature tests for continuous running on CI systems. Fixes #3136. 2018-08-21 17:39:36 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 57660d131f 1) Fix sort/filter dialog editing issue. Fixes #3558.
2) Fix sort/filter dialog issue where it incorrectly requires ASC/DESC. Fixes #3325.
2018-08-21 13:05:40 +05:30
Joao De Almeida Pereira 46d4bf027d Ensure sql for Role should be visible in SQL panel for GPDB. Fixes #3578 2018-08-17 14:50:16 +05:30
Akshay Joshi d68c967423 Fix passing of --globals-only to global backups. 2018-08-16 14:20:32 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal ff87cf5544 Correctly handle "values" in web/pgadmin/__init__.py -> strip_version_number which can be None in some cases and will cause exception when None 2018-08-16 09:23:58 +01:00
Ashesh Vashi 0a8d7a37b9 Changed the icon, label, inode, etc. propely while refreshing the
browser tree item.

Refs #3461
2018-08-14 10:18:03 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 008359ad3a Ensure that refreshing a node also updates the Property list. Fixes #3461 2018-08-13 13:47:07 +01:00
Ashesh Vashi ffd41009ea We were refering to the wrong 'name' variable during cleaning up the
backform controls.
2018-08-12 15:44:52 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 7b2c1bb9f8 Handle connection errors properly in the query tool. Fixes #3528 2018-08-10 13:51:32 +01:00
Isaias Sanchez 2eac2f43ac Add a Spanish translation. Fixes #3553 2018-08-08 17:17:26 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 7117ce6a22 Fix keyboard shortcuts layout in the preferences panel. Fixes #3407 2018-08-07 14:41:50 +01:00
Identifier Anonymous 3a5684510a Updated Japanese translation. 2018-08-07 13:07:47 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi d4b3ded725 Add missing library to list. 2018-08-07 09:21:30 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 7479467a54 Update version and message catalog for release. 2018-08-06 16:15:11 +05:30
Akshay Joshi c8c5f83dfe Add support to save and clear SSH Tunnel password. Fixes #3511 2018-08-06 15:56:46 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 52fc0846cd pgAdmin4 should work with python 3.7, Fixes #3458 2018-08-06 15:35:03 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal cb8a288f85 Added version number for URL's to ensure that files are only cached on a per-version basis. Fixes #2136. 2018-08-06 15:21:10 +05:30
Akshay Joshi a17aa212f0 COST statement should not be automatically duplicated after creating trigger function. Fixes #3526 2018-08-06 11:54:25 +05:30
Akshay Joshi e9e8b0b433 1. Change the string from 'Reset server password" to "Clear Saved Password" and move this sub menu from File to Object menu.
2. Move the "Change Password..." menu from 'File' to 'Object' menu.
RM #3074
2018-08-03 16:41:01 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 8f45e6fe68 View Data->Filtered Rows dialog should be displayed. Fixes #3527 2018-08-02 18:15:58 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi c4267f0878 Fixed couple of issues for the dashboard.
- Filter for the grids were showing on the server level dashboard.
  It was regression of the commit-id: f7e43d5e5
- Mark 'is_server_dashboard', and 'is_database_dashboard' to false, when
  the node has its own dashboard URL defined.
2018-07-30 13:33:20 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi 0cb25bde63 Add support for primary key, foreign key, unique key, indexes and triggers on partitioned tables for PG/EPAS 11. Fixes #3412 2018-07-27 17:31:21 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 0138dee989 Add support for reset saved password. Fixes #3074 2018-07-27 14:36:42 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 00139f7750 Remove the unused variable to satisfy the linter. 2018-07-27 13:43:37 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 5ff2942b4d Improved the functionality of enable/disable the auto-collection of
the graph data.

- Dashboard is intereseted only on the current selected object in the
  browser tree. And, not the one, which was got disconnected.
- Disable the auto-collection of data selectively, and only when the
  selected object got disconnected, and not when changing back to the
  Dashboard panel (as per Aditya).
2018-07-27 13:14:24 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 35862b94a9 We need to remove the interval callbacks for retrieving the statistics
for the charts on dashboard every time the URL changed (not - just when
connection to the server was alive).
2018-07-26 22:44:34 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi e2ce73d855 'anyFamilyMember' runs the condition function for all nodes in the
hierarchy. No need to run the 'dashboardURL' function in the
'getDashboardURL' function for the current node too.
2018-07-26 21:37:40 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal be3f9570e3 Fixed dashboard reloading even if subnodes under a dashboard or server selected. 2018-07-25 13:11:00 +01:00
Ashesh Vashi 53b5043520 As per Aditya - we need the server version for the certain operations,
which was removed during previous commit.
2018-07-25 13:07:28 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi e12e00703f Refactored the dashboard code, which was allowing each node type to
define its own dashboardURL.

There was a typo, while calling the dashboard function of a Node type.
2018-07-25 12:28:44 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal f7e43d5e50 Realtime preference handling for the Dashboards and Debugger. Fixes #3294 2018-07-24 16:31:44 +01:00
Dave Page ae814d76d3 Update release notes. 2018-07-23 16:19:19 +01:00
Dave Page d7eb41fff4 Include a cacert file when needed for the upgrade check. Fixes #3185 2018-07-23 16:15:58 +01:00
Dave Page 58ef723476 SESSION_SKIP_PATHS should be set before we load local or distro config files. 2018-07-23 15:44:54 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 213cb440d0 Add support for SCRAM password changes (requires psycopg2 >= 2.8). Fixes #2214 2018-07-23 15:03:44 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 2d1e835d32 Fix panel errors seen when click on partitions. 2018-07-23 14:33:40 +01:00
Dave Page cb9fffc7de Remove comment that's not really needed any more. 2018-07-20 16:56:03 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal c353135a3a Add support for INCLUDE columns on indexes and index constraints with PG 11+. Fixes #3462 2018-07-19 13:13:37 +01:00
Dave Page a86604160a Allow the user to specify a fixed port number in the runtime to aid cookie whitelisting etc. Fixes #3506 2018-07-19 12:54:53 +01:00
Dave Page 2ce41e77f2 Add a menu option to the runtime to copy the appserver URL to the clipboard. Fixes #3510 2018-07-19 11:32:40 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 051ce6afeb Ensure the SSH tunnel port number is honoured. Fixes #3471 2018-07-19 10:52:16 +01:00
Akshay Joshi ce768c7f8a Support SSH tunneling with keys that don't have a passphrase. Fixes #3468 2018-07-18 14:15:05 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 7f7feee8c1 Added keyboard shortcut for 'pgAdmin4' menu. 2018-07-17 18:52:06 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 1fc82d328c Fix backup in directory format on Windows. 2018-07-17 13:04:28 +01:00
Akshay Joshi ba8f745f70 Exclude system columns in Import/Export. Fixes #3448 2018-07-17 13:01:40 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 8869fd6eb3 Fix a number of debugger execution issues. Fixes #3191
1. EPAS packages' function/procedure does not honour INOUT arguments, it converts INOUT to OUT.

2.  Packages' functions and procedures are not getting listed in their respected nodes in some scenarios like procedure having INOUT argument and function with void return type

3. The Reverse engineering SQL is not correct for Packages' functions/procedures

4. In case of INOUT argument, debugger asks for mendatory input which should not.

5. Re-executing a procedure whilst direct debugging doesn't work.
2018-07-17 12:51:24 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 39b41d7b24 Various procedure/function related fixes for EPAS/PG 11. Fixes #3446
- Fix the RM #3446 "plpgsql keyword should displayed in SQL pane for EPAS-11".
- Procedures for EPAS 11 always created as 'edbspl', even though language is sql or plpgsql.
- Not able to create Function/Procedure/Trigger function if the language is "C" for all supported database server.
- Function creation for EPAS 9.6 and above when set "Window?" flag to "Yes".
- Disable Volatility, Strict, Parallel, Estimated cost and Leak prof while creating procedures in EPAS 11 when language is not 'edbspl'.
- Rename "default" folder to "11_plus" inside "pg" directory for procedures, as procedures are supported from PG11 onwards.
- Creating/Deleting parameter in Procedure for PG 11.
- Drop procedures with arguments for PG/EPAS 11.
pg_proc table has added default value 'v' for Volatility, 100 for Cost and 'u' for Parallel for any language. All the three are not supported for Procedures in PG/EPAS 11 (excluding 'edbspl' language for EPAS). Fixed the issue where it is visible in properties panel if we create procedure using language 'plpgsql' or 'sql'.
2018-07-17 12:43:46 +01:00
Dave Page a49923dba2 Add hints for the config options. 2018-07-17 12:18:37 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 765a88addf Support running on systems without a system tray. Fixes #3316 2018-07-17 12:10:35 +01:00
Dave Page 0137cfaee3 Update message catalogs:
1455 of 1984 messages (73%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1910 of 1984 messages (96%) translated in pgadmin/translations/fr/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1941 of 1984 messages (97%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1789 of 1984 messages (90%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ko/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1785 of 1984 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1787 of 1984 messages (90%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1411 of 1984 messages (71%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2018-07-12 10:04:07 +01:00
Ioseph Kim c7325bea93 Add a Korean translation. 2018-07-12 10:02:54 +01:00
Dave Page c6dba67d06 Add "messages" target to extract, update and compile message catalogs for convenience. 2018-07-12 10:00:40 +01:00
Dave Page 0c6e80f64d Improve sizing on Linux 2018-07-11 13:31:19 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 2b9c0a63fb Ensure CodeMirror always has a non-zero font size. Fixes #3480 2018-07-10 13:58:44 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 3b862bd70b More jQuery 3 updates. 2018-07-10 10:59:53 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal d1784137a5 Ensure text is visible in the SQL Filter dialogue. Fixes #3478 2018-07-09 14:08:41 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 41a8333145 Replace deprecated success, error callbacks in $.ajax call with new functions .done and .fail. 2018-07-09 13:54:00 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 81312d17e2 Add feature tests for Backup/Restore and Maintenance. Fixes #3206 2018-07-09 11:27:25 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 2b20b387e2 Add support for Trigger and JIT stats in the graphical query plan viewer. Fixes #3397 2018-07-06 13:13:14 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 73530c05aa Add missing files related to previous commit: Infrastructure and changes to the Query Tool for realtime preference handling. Refs #3294 2018-07-05 11:41:01 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal bdb7e3fde2 Infrastructure and changes to the Query Tool for realtime preference handling. Refs #3294
Highlights of this patch include:
- Changes will affect SQL Editors in Create dialog boxes, SQL tab of the main screen, Query tool, History entries in the query tool, Query tool opened in New Tab/Window
- All the components of SQL editor will refer to single source of preferences which is cached in the Browser object. All other redundant ajax get preference calls are removed.
- SQL editor will not refer template JS variables anymore, once all the references are removed the template variables will also be removed.
- Code refactoring wherever possible.
- Covered JS test cases wherever possible.
2018-07-05 11:38:43 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 82d77c4608 Don't create a session when the /misc/ping test endpoint is called. Fixes #3371 2018-07-05 11:12:03 +01:00
Dave Page 165c4744b0 Correct the runtime options list. 2018-07-05 09:13:46 +01:00
Dave Page e802f2db64 Correct bug number. 2018-07-02 15:55:57 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi d56f1b17f3 Fix restoring of restore options for sections. Fixes #3362 2018-07-02 15:53:19 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 28e0220e97 Fix restoring of restore options for sections. Fixes # 2018-07-02 15:52:15 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala d53c47e1cf Cleanup and fix handling of Query Tool Cancel button status. Fixes #3319 2018-07-02 15:43:36 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala b390c033cf Fix debugging of procedures in EPAS packages. Fixes #3457 2018-06-29 15:20:33 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi fb1ef9ac0b Properly support backups in Directory format. Fixes #3309 2018-06-29 15:14:37 +01:00
Dave Page c85ced4c6b Prep 3.2 release notes page. 2018-06-29 14:37:05 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 43aa0c9f3c Fix wheel deps 2018-06-28 13:03:24 +01:00
Dave Page fbbf9d1de2 Fix stupid typo 2018-06-28 12:56:33 +01:00
Dave Page 6afaa4f400 Fix bug number, per Khushboo 2018-06-28 11:14:57 +01:00
Dave Page 21fd953672 PEP-8 fix 2018-06-27 16:55:57 +01:00
Shubham Agarwal ec476d6274 Feature test reliability improvements:
1. click_tab() -> Added wait till element is clickable, test cases are failing since the function attempts to click the tab which is not yet in the state to be clicked.

2. add_server() -> Replaced the sleep statement with wait till element to be clickable.
2018-06-27 16:40:03 +01:00
Dave Page ce8fb28b34 Message catalog updates:
1459 of 2000 messages (72%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1930 of 2000 messages (96%) translated in pgadmin/translations/fr/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1961 of 2000 messages (98%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1796 of 2000 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1798 of 2000 messages (89%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1415 of 2000 messages (70%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2018-06-27 11:48:33 +01:00
Identifier Anonymous 6ca07528ff Japanese translation fixes. 2018-06-27 11:46:39 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 8136b72364 Fix a French translation error that could prevent the server starting up. Fixes #3411 2018-06-27 11:42:23 +01:00
Dave Page f04b2e33b5 Prep for 3.1 release. 2018-06-26 11:13:46 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 08e4cdf2ac Updated extension upgrade message. Fixes #3445 2018-06-26 11:53:46 +05:30
Dave Page 27bb7ff5db Don't use imple variable notation in bash scripts. 2018-06-25 17:00:21 +01:00
Dave Page 5bdd80e3da Correct version comparison, per Khushboo. 2018-06-25 16:41:34 +01:00
Akshay Joshi cf29e8df90 Require v1.1 of the pldbgapi extension to debug on EPAS 11. 2018-06-25 16:01:53 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 57c054fb0e Fix various Drop menu options that were broken during the treeview refactoring.
Fixes #3442. Fixes #3443. Fixes #3444
2018-06-25 15:52:12 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 4a71c6d7af Various EPAS/PG11 function & procedure fixes. Fixes #3421. Fixes #3422 2018-06-25 14:58:02 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 1f5ca1b540 Allow sorting in the file dialogue. Fixes #3273 2018-06-25 14:41:07 +01:00
Dave Page 4ba0e1a6f3 Fix Python 2.6 support for SQL_ASCII data in the query tool. 2018-06-21 17:06:28 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 560e5f225a Allow dropping of Procedures in PG 11. Fixes #3423 2018-06-21 16:36:10 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 83f9d8a547 Minor fix to handle auto-discovery of servers with no port recorded. 2018-06-21 16:34:33 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 480fe6b9fc Fixed issue of detection of EPAS server 11 and above. Version string is changed in EPAS 11 2018-06-21 18:30:37 +05:30
Dave Page 8480c10c74 Update release notes. 2018-06-21 08:32:15 -04:00
Aditya Toshniwal df85392bbf Fix handling of SQL_ASCII data in the query tool. Fixes #3289. Fixes #3250 2018-06-21 08:26:01 -04:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 155f82676d Fix the RE-SQL generation for GreenPlum external tables. Fixes #3431 2018-06-19 20:01:45 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 7a06acb678 Allow the connection timeout to be configured on a per-server basis. Fixes #3388 2018-06-19 19:58:46 -04:00
Dave Page 9821e28da5 Fix file permissions per Devrim 2018-06-19 16:09:49 -04:00
Dave Page 717637c5b9 Fix indent. 2018-06-18 13:47:39 -04:00
Akshay Joshi a45c33cf76 Ensure that template0 and template1 are available as tempates when creating databasesa. Fixes #3361
[regardless of the Show System Objects? option]
2018-06-18 13:41:14 -04:00
Khushboo Vashi 521985c11a README update 2018-06-18 12:51:38 -04:00
Ashesh Vashi f2cef38364 Flask 1.0.2 does not allow a dot (.) in the view_func name, which we use
during generting the routes for the node.

References:
https://github.com/pallets/flask/commit/2f57a0b917478a028859b9d036b59cf1bba6cad2
https://github.com/pallets/flask/issues/2790

Fixes #3360
Reported by: Marcelo Mendes
Investigated by: Khushboo Vashi
2018-06-18 09:58:16 +05:30
Dave Page 5f51c39e6f Delete the venv folder prior to upgrade. Fixes #3384 2018-06-17 21:10:17 -04:00
Khushboo Vashi ba8829b64f Further Python 2.6 fixes. 2018-06-15 15:03:53 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi ab54a6d39a Fix external utilities to run with Python 2.6. 2018-06-15 12:38:31 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi d1902cd639 Add Python API tests for execution of external utilities such as pg_dump. 2018-06-15 11:36:07 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 766b389001 Include the schema name on RE-SQL for packages. Fixes #3356 2018-06-15 10:40:14 +01:00
Akshay Joshi b48145f01f Add an option to auto-complete keywords in upper case. Fixes #2686 2018-06-15 10:18:56 +01:00
Akshay Joshi df7b4d55c6 Remove an extra space in Procedure templates. 2018-06-15 09:16:00 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 1a6b6f61f7 Fix documentation indexing. 2018-06-15 09:14:12 +01:00
Dave Page 96544424dd Don't pipe the list of binaries through uniq.
It seems to be overflowing a buffer and truncating output with Python 3,
plus it's being fed a single line only so isn't actually doing anything.
2018-06-14 17:03:16 +01:00
Dave Page 1d322e2cd9 Enable building of the appbundle with Python 3.6. 2018-06-14 16:16:30 +01:00
Dave Page 087db8a75e Fix stored procedure test cases so they don't fail on EPAS 9.4 2018-06-13 17:01:19 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 88a2309a26 Fix auto-complete. Fixes #3374 2018-06-13 15:53:21 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi d1ecba56b8 Function and procedure support for PG11. Fixes #3362 2018-06-13 15:03:17 +01:00
Joao De Almeida Pereira e5048b4d0b Disable ACLs for the database objects for the Greenplum due to
performance issue.

Reviewed By: Ashesh
Fixes #3415
2018-06-12 10:07:23 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala e2b0cf6727 Fix labels and popups on EXPLAIN plan that were broken by the jQuery 3 update. Fixes #3404 2018-06-11 17:03:21 +01:00
Victoria Henry 226c872a84 Avoid an exception on GreenPlum when retrieving RE-SQL on a table. Fixes #3409 2018-06-11 16:56:39 +01:00
Anthony DeBarros a6ee27cf25 s/shutdown/shut down/ 2018-06-08 08:45:02 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 419f9069ae Move the notifications tab between messages and history as it seems more natural there. 2018-06-06 09:23:33 +01:00
Joao De Almeida Pereira 7dd6372eeb Extract the tests and refactor some of the methods.
Extract some of the ACI Tree functionalities, and decouple it from the
main source. Also - create some abstractions from the repeated code
around the enable/disable the schema children object create/edit/delete
functionalities, and also created the dialog wrappers for backup and
restore dialogs.

Reviewed by: Khushboo and Ashesh
Refactored by: Ashesh
2018-06-05 16:42:59 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal 920934759f Handle a potential error case in the connection status monitoring.
When you disconnect the server with an open sqleditor tab, exception
 occurs at the back end. Also, after connecting server, the sqleditor
 is not able to connect back because of the exception.
2018-06-05 11:57:56 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 20ea8a69f5 Fix constraint on servers table in SQLite to allow ports < 1024. Fixes #3307 2018-06-05 10:47:03 +01:00
Dave Page 2860e82c63 Fix Gunicorn binding for IPv4. 2018-05-31 10:57:09 -04:00
Dave Page 6719ff141b Correct package name 2018-05-31 10:49:30 -04:00
Dave Page 4372dd051e Include libffi-devel in the Docker build. 2018-05-31 10:48:32 -04:00
Dave Page 98f84e5f34 Ignore the ycache directory when linting. 2018-05-31 10:34:29 -04:00
Dave Page 985e089c23 Update the release notes. 2018-05-31 10:29:47 -04:00
Dave Page eec9714191 Bind the container server to ipv6 as well as ipv4 ports. Fixes #3392 2018-05-31 10:27:23 -04:00
Murtuza Zabuawala f877de6a1f Fix an issue where a change to any field in server dialog causes the 'tunnel_identity_file' model value to get included unnecessarily in the update request. Fixes #3389 2018-05-31 10:10:43 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 5f0799714d Cleanup Python 3 server startup code. Fixes #3277 2018-05-31 10:07:08 -04:00
Dave Page bc63b278be Remove bug 3357 from the release notes. As it was a fix to a feature that will be in the next release, users will never have seen the bug so we shouldn't list it in the notes. 2018-05-31 07:10:56 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 55232b0944 Fixed ordering of changes in release note and added one missing entry. 2018-05-31 14:51:58 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 86712b1bd2 Add support for source maps in the karma test framework to aid debugging. 2018-05-30 22:09:00 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 38ee39ae7a Add support for LISTEN/NOTIFY in the query tool. Fixes #3204 2018-05-30 21:58:28 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 2b4605a9d3 Ensure backup/restore/maintenance work via SSH tunnels. Fixes #3355 2018-05-30 21:25:42 -04:00
Dave Page b00931407e Fix failed yarn changes 2018-05-30 16:53:03 -04:00
Dave Page bea176a646 Fix failed yarn changes 2018-05-30 16:52:54 -04:00
Dave Page 6a28b9ff26 Revert failed Yarn changes. 2018-05-30 16:52:37 -04:00
Dave Page 8bda4e0230 Remove duplicate options 2018-05-30 16:48:23 -04:00
Dave Page 189e307671 Fix syntax 2018-05-30 16:42:09 -04:00
Dave Page b2d4c6ef9d Disable emojis in Yarn output. 2018-05-30 16:34:47 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 17977d5d0e Fix dropping of databases over SSH tunneled connections. Fixes #3357 2018-05-28 17:37:24 -04:00
Akshay Joshi 08990cb1de Handle errors properly if they occur when renaming a database. Fixes #3353 2018-05-28 17:35:33 -04:00
Aditya Toshniwal 9f13865777 Update jQuery to 3.3.1. Fixes #3271
Patch by Aditya, with test enhancements from Anthony and Joao at Pivotal.
2018-05-25 16:26:37 +01:00
Dave Page 61d8072a8c Batch, not bash!! Correct the syntax. 2018-05-23 13:09:40 +01:00
Dave Page fa07400fdd Hack to compile PyCrypto with VC++ 2018-05-23 13:04:58 +01:00
Dave Page dab5d94b7c Fix PyCrypto if using Python 3. 2018-05-23 10:00:46 +01:00
Dave Page 2c6938491e Add missing . 2018-05-23 08:48:26 +01:00
Dave Page fa57c02d0e Add some more missing CALL statements 2018-05-22 16:35:55 +01:00
Dave Page 83bee60fa4 CALL all external programs, or labels cannot be found. 2018-05-22 16:16:30 +01:00
Dave Page 81a5e1ffd3 Minor fixes 2018-05-22 15:41:10 +01:00
Dave Page 0b5912b09c Handle dependencies that may or may not be present. 2018-05-22 14:40:44 +01:00
Dave Page 5780719035 There's no need to activate/deactivate/activate the venv. 2018-05-22 14:01:13 +01:00
Dave Page f0f530e824 Returning %ERRORLEVEL% is proving unreliable. Just return 1 instead if there's an error. 2018-05-22 13:39:03 +01:00
Dave Page 0bf89f3dc0 Need to CALL Yarn. 2018-05-21 15:34:08 +01:00
Dave Page d5e48ecdc2 Further windows make script cleanup. 2018-05-21 15:06:14 +01:00
Dave Page 066a59d89c Don't barf on nested parentheses as we may find on 64 bit systems. 2018-05-21 12:54:19 +01:00
Dave Page e1a3caa780 Major cleanup of the Windows installer build script. 2018-05-18 13:27:57 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 6492dacbb2 Ensure the debugger container has focus when loaded. Fixes #3295 - this time on Firefox too! 2018-05-18 11:33:42 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal a4ed9d6976 Allow connections to servers with port numbers < 1024 which may be seen in container environments. Fixes #3307 2018-05-18 11:12:38 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 28126a0a0d Fixed pep8 issue for last commit. 2018-05-18 11:30:40 +05:30
Akshay Joshi fb0c322ccf Correct the logic to set the SUPPORT_SSH_TUNNEL flag, if the flag is set the False in local config file, then we should not override it. 2018-05-18 11:26:11 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 719938a14c Fixed issue where 'Identity file' control of SSH Tunnel tab is enabled when database is connected and 'Use SSH tunneling' flag is set to No. 2018-05-17 17:18:00 +05:30
Anthony Emengo a7ee85619d Using the '.eslintignore' config file for excluding the temporary,
vendor specific, and templates files, instead of writing our own logic
to do so.

Patch by: Anthony & Joao
Reviewed by: Khushboo
2018-05-17 11:34:04 +05:30
Dave Page bd356ff9fa Fix a couple of find/replace errors. 2018-05-16 16:35:23 +01:00
Dave Page 765e0d03be Further cleanup of the environment setup 2018-05-16 16:31:41 +01:00
Dave Page 76749efb12 Further cleanup of the environment setup 2018-05-16 16:26:00 +01:00
Dave Page 9f8f1e8972 Rough cleanup of the environment setup 2018-05-16 16:15:44 +01:00
Dave Page 6d33542b24 PGDIR isn't needed in the path and we shouldn't have random Mingw paths hard-coded. 2018-05-16 14:39:58 +01:00
Dave Page ae03b7c226 PYTHON_VERSION is set automatically. Use it to conditionally fix the backports module. 2018-05-16 14:28:15 +01:00
Dave Page 246c434b61 No need to define PGADMIN4_USE_WEBKIT any more. 2018-05-16 13:33:53 +01:00
Dave Page 4496a97a97 Assume Yarn and Node are always in the path 2018-05-16 11:58:57 +01:00
Dave Page 7a1d9c750a Use VCINSTALLDIR instead of VCDIR, as that is set by Visual Studio 2018-05-16 11:56:30 +01:00
Akshay Joshi ccf58570b1 Support running feature tests against Firefox. Fixes #3270 2018-05-15 15:10:11 +01:00
Dave Page 8d9e9eab13 Allow "make" to be overridden in the environment. 2018-05-14 17:08:40 +01:00
Dave Page fe81ae3285 Correct error message 2018-05-14 16:16:18 +01:00
Anthony Emengo ab27b9d118 Fix template handling in tests for Windows. 2018-05-14 15:47:38 +01:00
Joao De Almeida Pereira bc4d16eb83 Initial version of the new tree implementation.
This is the first version of our Tree implementation. At this point is a
very simple tree without no abstractions and with code that eventually
is not very performant, but this is only the first iteration and we are
trying to follow the 'Last Responsible Moment Principle' [1].

Implemention details:
- Creation of PGBrowser.treeMenu
- Initial version of the Tree Adaptor 'pgadmin/static/js/tree/tree.js'
- TreeFake test double that can replace the Tree for testing purposes
- Tests, As an interesting asside because Fake’s need to behave like
  the real object you will noticed that there are tests for this type
  of double and they the same as of the real object.

[1] https://medium.com/@aidanjcasey/guiding-principles-for-an-evolutionary-software-architecture-b6dc2cb24680

Patched by: Victoria && Joao
Reviewed by: Khushboo & Ashesh
2018-05-14 18:00:23 +05:30
Aditya Toshniwal a34b3f27d4 Fix webpack config regexps to be more Windows-friendly. 2018-05-11 10:23:37 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 252a9b265b Ensure server cleanup on exit only happens if the server actually started up. Fixes #3277 2018-05-11 09:33:09 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala e17b62c055 Using the latest version (v2.3.0) of jquery.event.drop. 2018-05-10 13:26:10 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi ccdc1a6c74 Revert back to jquery version 1.12.4 until we fix the jasmine testsuite, which is failing with jQuery (v3.0+) 2018-05-10 13:24:42 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala a02a4eb51a Using the latest version (v2.3.0) of jquery.event.drag to fix the
jasmine testsuite.
2018-05-10 12:24:54 +05:30
Joao De Almeida Pereira b8f49daeb8 Change the order of the shims in the shims file.
Patch by: Victoria && Joao
Reviweb by: Khushboo
2018-05-10 12:06:43 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi b8d0db7e7a Using the 'webcabin-docker' from new repository, which contains fixed
for supporting jQuery 3.0+.

Also - updated the jquery version to '^3.0'.
2018-05-10 12:02:33 +05:30
Dave Page 26ae8318f2 Release notes update. 2018-05-09 14:28:15 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi ba23ba9b8b Ensure the debugger container has focus when loaded. Fixes #3295 2018-05-09 14:26:50 +01:00
Dave Page 0ffd3d0451 Update release notes 2018-05-09 14:06:17 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala a68dac97c4 Set SESSION_COOKIE_SAMESITE='Lax' per Flask recommendation to prevents sending cookies with CSRF-prone requests from external sites, such as submitting a form. Fixes #3342 2018-05-09 14:04:50 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal 5b86a67a41 Fixed query tool keyboard issue where arrow keys were not behaving as expected for execute options dropdown. Fixes #3298 2018-05-09 13:05:22 +05:30
Dave Page 5960644bae Fix ordering of changes in release notes. 2018-05-08 11:04:53 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 39ea7c2916 Updated release note for 3.1 2018-05-08 14:38:51 +05:30
Dave Page c68848e7f3 Ensure the runtime core application is setup before trying to access any settings. Fixes #3333 2018-05-08 09:54:33 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 3ac3e73daf Fixed layout of the alertify error message in the query tool. Fixes #3310 2018-05-07 16:04:47 +05:30
Khushboo Vashi 567f764234 Backup, Maintenance and Restore should not be started if database name contains "=" symbol. Fixes #1220 #1221 2018-05-07 15:09:12 +05:30
Dave Page 8937375885 Standardise the error handling for parsing of JSON response messages from the server. Fixes #3238 2018-05-04 16:56:15 +01:00
Dave Page 4f79f00d61 One day I'll remember to update the version everywhere... 2018-05-04 14:13:57 +01:00
Dave Page 554a199fd2 Bump version to avoid confusion 2018-05-04 13:52:24 +01:00
Akshay Joshi b7fb01ab04 Add support for SSH tunneled connections. Fixes #1447 2018-05-04 11:27:27 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 455c45ea85 Update chromedriver version to support Chrome 66. 2018-05-04 10:20:14 +01:00
Anthony Emengo 3ff56b2d49 Scroll cells into the viewport if needed during the CheckForViewData feature test. 2018-05-04 10:15:02 +01:00
Anthony Emengo 56658a9f8e Fix the template loader to work reliably under Windows (fixing external tables under Greenplum). Fixes #3324 2018-05-03 15:54:15 +01:00
Dave Page 59d8f6fb84 Allow feature tests to run in Chrome headless mode. 2018-05-02 16:51:17 +01:00
Dave Page f0b6fb0e5d Python 3 fixes 2018-05-02 12:05:17 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 732d8d903d F5 key should work to refresh Browser tree. Fixes #3284
Refactoring by:  Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira
2018-05-02 11:43:42 +05:30
Dave Page c2122fbfb9 Fix mis-edit. 2018-04-30 17:15:44 +01:00
Dave Page ae1b2149a1 HAve the clean target zap any generated JS or CSS. Fixes #3134 2018-04-30 16:13:51 +01:00
Ashesh Vashi c94439bf8e Fixed the issues for all the javascript files reported by the liner. 2018-04-30 17:51:57 +05:30
Joao De Almeida Pereira 31e73f4096 Ensure the JS-linter is running on all the tests files. 2018-04-30 17:50:51 +05:30
Dave Page 92ba055d66 Fix compiler warning. 2018-04-27 13:27:37 +01:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 201f6d359f Cleanup some old code that was failing CI. 2018-04-26 16:21:46 +01:00
Joao De Almeida Pereira 966279c1b3 Fixed issue where icon for Partitioned tables was the same as Non Partitioned tables for GreenPlum database. Fixes #3308 2018-04-26 17:05:56 +05:30
Joao De Almeida Pereira 2ace6a60f3 Fixed display SQL of table with index for GreenPlum database. Fixes #3306 2018-04-25 12:36:41 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi b653b742ed Close button added to the alertify message box, which pops up in case of backend error. Fixes #3290 2018-04-24 18:57:31 +05:30
Dave Page eb35629712 Another attempt at making the JA translation work properly. Gettext really doesn't seem to like percentage signs. Fixes #3303 2018-04-20 09:46:50 +01:00
Taiki Terauchi 51cc7c1e33 Fix an error in the Japanese translation that caused a startup failure. Fixes #3303 2018-04-20 09:12:03 +01:00
Dave Page 3ecfabfde5 Fix python wheel dependencies. 2018-04-19 17:08:06 +01:00
Dave Page 71620dc26e This time, properly fix Alertify version requirement which inadvertently got bumped. 2018-04-18 09:23:16 +01:00
Dave Page dea7491df6 Fix Alertify version requirement which inadvertently got bumped. 2018-04-18 09:09:28 +01:00
Dave Page 8f90b801bd Fix typo 2018-04-17 09:15:17 +01:00
Dave Page bb49d69293 Add required HTMLmin version - the Flask-htmlmin package doesn't seem to pull in the right version. 2018-04-17 08:58:47 +01:00
Identifier Anonymous 0493b86d4d Update Japanese translation. 2018-04-16 15:38:39 +01:00
Aditya Toshniwal d5fdd32971 Fix an error generating SQL for trigger functions. Fixes #3179 2018-04-12 14:10:35 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c08adb5567 Catch errors when trying to EXPLAIN an invalid query. Fixes #3257 2018-04-12 10:50:57 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 79edf40141 Fix password encryption/decryption on Python 3. 2018-04-11 13:45:59 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 8232f26882 Avoid a crash in the runtime if there are spaces in the users username. Fixes #3227 2018-04-11 13:34:21 +01:00
Rahul Soshte e467ffcfe4 Add a couple of files for git to ignore. 2018-04-11 09:58:44 +01:00
Dave Page 163cadc279 Revert "Fix non-ASCII password decryption/encryption under Python 3"
This reverts commit d0a640442c.

Seems to anger Python 2.7
2018-04-10 17:12:14 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala d0a640442c Fix non-ASCII password decryption/encryption under Python 3 2018-04-10 16:50:43 +01:00
Dave Page be2ac25fed Cleanup node modules when cleaning 2018-04-10 11:15:57 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala f5e474e4ec Ensure the query tool will open properly under MS Edge. 2018-04-10 11:09:59 +01:00
Dave Page 97cf58fdc8 Only avoid pre-built binaries for psycopg2 when building the Mac package, as some others (e.g. pbr) don't like being forced to source builds at the moment. 2018-04-10 09:29:40 +01:00
Dave Page 051fd645d7 Don't use pycryptodome at the moment, as it doesn't play well on Windows. 2018-04-10 09:27:59 +01:00
Dave Page 9464e04cf8 Ignore generated file 2018-04-09 16:31:29 +01:00
Dave Page 9b115c5e46 Message catalog update 2018-04-06 14:59:51 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 78c3db6fc9 Update filter dialogue Javascript to use ES6. 2018-04-06 10:38:04 +01:00
Dave Page a97e4c76e4 Update developer docs to note that ES6 should be used and tests should be included. 2018-04-06 10:06:35 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 8ec51412c3 Add a (configurable) limit to the number of pgAgent job history rows displayed on the statistics tab. Fixes #3072 2018-04-06 10:00:25 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala fa1854bd85 Allow sorting when viewing/editing data. Fixes #1894 2018-04-05 16:25:17 +01:00
Neel Patel 659390493d Ensure Alertify dialogues are modal to prevent them being closed by mis-click. Fixes #3248 2018-04-05 11:28:18 +01:00
Максим Кольцов 05e2e3cb39 Update container build to use Alpine Linux and Gunicorn instead of CentOS and Apache. Fixes #3246
This results in a much more slim-line container, requiring fewer resources to run.
In addition, the majority of the build is now done using the Docker infrastructure, allowing for quicker rebuilds and better use of layers.
2018-04-04 16:18:17 +01:00
Dave Page 1617d003cd Cleanup some duplication in the requirements. 2018-04-04 14:17:47 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala a95775ae49 Another attempt to fix the Python 2.6 deps. 2018-04-04 13:42:38 +01:00
Dave Page 33890da57e Typo fix. 2018-04-04 13:16:19 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c0cfc9f29b SQLAlchemy stopped supporting Python 2.6. 2018-04-04 12:59:05 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala b7c86da586 Fix requirements for Python 2.6. 2018-04-04 12:26:44 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala a705fb46a8 Refactor and simplify query tool connection error handling code. Fixes #3235 2018-04-04 11:20:36 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala be055ce57d Update Python and JS modules. Fixes #3154 2018-04-04 10:47:01 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi fc886cf8bb Update screenshot. 2018-04-04 10:05:07 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 7805170783 Add the ability to enable/disable UI animations. Fixes #1978 2018-04-03 14:52:13 +01:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 94e1e46201 Show more granular timing info in the query tool history panel. Fixes #3244 2018-04-03 14:11:11 +01:00
Akshay Joshi 61eb94a23c Fix index node display on PG 10. Fixes #3180 2018-03-29 15:09:29 +02:00
Akshay Joshi 1baddd5e9a Decode the severity field in database exception objects properly. Fixes #3090 2018-03-26 13:59:49 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 413709fc78 Simplify cookie domain/path settings, per discussion. Instead of trying to be smart, just let the user specify them in the config, e.g.
COOKIE_DEFAULT_DOMAIN = None
SESSION_COOKIE_DOMAIN = None
2018-03-23 10:14:02 +00:00
Aditya Toshniwal 1f84285d99 Move the field error indicators in front of the affected fields so they don't obscure spinners or drop downs etc. Fixes #3226 2018-03-23 09:57:37 +00:00
Dave Page d5ebf6777a Fix target dependency per Rahul Soshte. 2018-03-22 13:47:26 +00:00
Rahul Soshte 6d7f795260 Enable building of the runtime from the top level Makefile. Fixes #1305 2018-03-22 11:19:42 +00:00
Dave Page 60c44e8f79 Fix issue seen with older versions of GCC. 2018-03-21 14:49:39 +00:00
Dave Page 80b29a85cc Secure runtime temp files. 2018-03-21 11:27:59 +00:00
Dave Page 6668d5eb93 Bump version for release. 2018-03-21 10:48:52 +00:00
Akshay Joshi 637f3b9d1a Fix a number of broken connection detection scenarios. 2018-03-21 08:38:18 +00:00
Karen Blatchley d358369ed5 Add some missing items to the release notes. 2018-03-20 14:46:49 +00:00
Dave Page c8b456d464 PEP8 fixes 2018-03-20 14:02:56 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 4942c938ac Fix an error on exit caused by the cookie path patch. 2018-03-20 13:55:06 +00:00
Karen Blatchley 3bd9bdad61 3.0 release notes 2018-03-20 13:48:37 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 35b0ab2fe1 Update Karma to 2.0 with plugins. Fixes #3222 2018-03-20 09:31:38 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 534f1f35fe Appropriately set the cookie path. Fixes #3197 2018-03-19 17:09:19 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 2abff8f5d4 Use a common function for sever setup in the testsuite. 2018-03-19 13:23:29 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 34f1ebc88e Ensure the host parameter is correctly pickup up from the service file. Fixes #3200 2018-03-19 12:38:44 +00:00
Fred Escallier 60893bcdd1 French translation update. 2018-03-19 11:22:47 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c312b03f6f Pass the service name to external processes. Fixes #3195 2018-03-19 11:01:04 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 9ea118ca57 Ensure the file manager properly escapes file & directory names. Fixes #3196 2018-03-19 10:58:12 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 48319d56df Update required ChromeDriver version for current versions of Chrome. Fixes #3219
This requires an update to build/test envs:

pip uninstall chromedriver_installer
pip install -r regression/requirements.txt
2018-03-19 10:05:41 +00:00
Dave Page 93d44d5643 Revert "Ensure the cookie domain and path are properly set. Fixes #3197"
This reverts commit 9c4edb4a28.

Jenkins really doesn't like this.
2018-03-15 14:54:14 -04:00
Khushboo Vashi 9c4edb4a28 Ensure the cookie domain and path are properly set. Fixes #3197 2018-03-15 13:59:29 -04:00
Khushboo Vashi 63ba3402e8 Ensure SSL options are pushed down to external tools like pg_dump. Fixes #3122 2018-03-15 07:35:47 -04:00
Dave Page 53ae960aeb Ignore config_local.py and config_distro.py when running PEP-8 checks. 2018-03-15 07:10:01 -04:00
Dave Page 010ee626bc Update message catalogs. Current status:
1469 of 1956 messages (75%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1842 of 1956 messages (94%) translated in pgadmin/translations/fr/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1679 of 1956 messages (85%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1812 of 1956 messages (92%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1814 of 1956 messages (92%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1424 of 1956 messages (72%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2018-03-15 07:01:34 -04:00
Fred Escallier 6c59563afa Add a French translation. Fixes #3184 2018-03-15 06:58:39 -04:00
Dave Page 1e303dafdd Exit CI run if the PEP-8 checks fail. 2018-03-15 06:53:34 -04:00
Murtuza Zabuawala faf243db71 Fixed PEP8 issue 2018-03-15 16:13:11 +05:30
Maxim Zakharov 54b1a79cb6 Sporadically crashes on Windows when exit. Fixes #3177
1) Shutdown the python server properly.
  2) Disabled "Shutdown server" menu till server is not successfully started.

Initial patch sent by Maxim, modified by Akshay Joshi.
2018-03-15 13:26:24 +05:30
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 3c4359270e Fix trim function which was causing some JS errors during Server Properties validation. Victoria & Joao 2018-03-14 17:58:01 -04:00
Dave Page 3c686d3fbe PEP-8 fixes 2018-03-13 17:30:07 -04:00
Khushboo Vashi 802269910c Fix unicode handling in the external process tools and show the complete command in the process viewer. Fixes #2963. Fixes #3157. 2018-03-13 16:45:20 -04:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 876ce1799a Skip tests where appropriate on GPDB. Fixes #3190
Victoria & Joao @ Pivotal.
2018-03-13 15:32:35 -04:00
Victoria Henry 6b03cb78af Refactor server dialogue validation for better unit testing.
Victoria & Joao @ Pivotal.
2018-03-13 14:47:32 -04:00
Dave Page 156b308fd3 Fix template paths for Windows. Fixes #3139
Joint work from Joao and Murtuza.
2018-03-13 12:45:14 -04:00
Dave Page 9365ab62fe Revert "Fix template path generation for Windows. Fixes #3139"
This reverts commit 695d4e648c.

It's borked!
2018-03-13 08:49:34 -04:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 695d4e648c Fix template path generation for Windows. Fixes #3139 2018-03-13 07:55:37 -04:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 03b772bf64 Add support for connecting using pg_service.conf files. Fixes #3140 2018-03-12 16:45:56 -04:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 985a004766 Fix SQL generated when dropping NOT NULL from a "char" column. Fixes #2989 2018-03-09 15:23:49 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 83477224cb Use test methods with @patch rather than directly. 2018-03-09 13:25:35 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 0283f68d7f Minor formatting fix 2018-03-08 11:07:05 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 7796a47b12 Fix test case for Python 2. 2018-03-08 10:21:24 +00:00
Dave Page e577859ed2 Always run PEP-8 checks! 2018-03-08 09:34:06 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 3a6994f719 Final PEP-8 fixes 2018-03-08 09:33:43 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi f86c313c18 More hardening of the query tool tests. 2018-03-08 09:12:48 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 1136e37cf0 Make the poll query test a little more robust. 2018-03-07 16:48:32 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala abf0b1a7ae Allow admins to disable the use of Gravatar if they choose. Fixes #3037 2018-03-07 16:35:33 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi ae5c13188d Insert rows correctly when a table has OIDs and a Primary Key in uppercase. Fixes #3135 2018-03-07 16:06:23 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira e7316e2181 Update Jasmine to v3. Fixes #3182 2018-03-07 16:01:04 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi d3c303e455 Ensure all messages are retrieved from the server in the Query Tool. Fixes #3094 2018-03-07 13:38:27 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira d1ab47c10c Disable function statistics on Greenplum. Fixes #3176 2018-03-07 11:52:02 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 06ff05762e PEP8 fixes. Fixes #3175 2018-03-07 11:47:01 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 427314cfdf Support for external tables in GPDB. Fixes #3168 2018-03-02 16:49:25 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 92a0bb605d Ensure we can edit grid values in the debugger using keyboard shortcuts. Fixes #3153 2018-03-02 15:05:04 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala efcf87636d Fix typo/thinko in access key definition. 2018-03-02 14:49:06 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 905cdafe90 PEP8 changes for the FDW modules. 2018-03-02 14:46:13 +00:00
Neethu Mariya Joy 0c48b79ce7 Allow copying of SQL from the dashboard tables. Fixes #3137 2018-03-02 14:39:12 +00:00
Neethu Mariya Joy 7471dea458 Allow text selection/copying from disabled CodeMirror instances. Fixes #2309 2018-03-02 13:46:06 +00:00
Dave Page 4d072ff781 Undo previous thinko - there's already a check-pep8 target. D'oh. 2018-03-02 13:43:42 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala da7f088508 Handle opening of non-UTF8 compatible files. Fixes #3129 2018-03-02 13:36:50 +00:00
Dave Page 803eadd5a1 Stupid Makefile syntax 2018-03-02 12:35:12 +00:00
Dave Page 31f50634c7 Add a makefile target for running PEP8 checks. 2018-03-02 12:01:55 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 8964e511bf PEP8 fixes for the Casts, Event triggers, Extensions and Languages modules. Fixes #3161 2018-03-02 11:59:11 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 7cdb489a47 Fix handling of tie/datetime array types when adding columns to a table. Fixes #3079 2018-03-02 11:51:53 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 78e2ff4f56 Ensure the pgAgent job start/end time grid fields synchronise with the subnode control and validate correctly. Fixes #3073 2018-03-02 11:11:26 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi a4124c2496 PEP8 fixes. 2018-03-02 09:37:11 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala cca6504d54 PEP8 fixes. Fixes #3156 2018-02-27 15:38:50 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala f5afd5fdb4 Fix block indent/outdent with configurable width. Fixes #3002 2018-02-27 15:20:30 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala a9de043fef Add keyboard shortcuts for the Query Tool. Fixes #2900 2018-02-27 14:32:03 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 055f7abc9e PEP8 fixes for the server and server group modules. 2018-02-27 11:22:14 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal aa1849c13a Support tab navigation in dialogs. Fixes #2898 2018-02-27 11:18:36 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 3be22383b8 Fix function reserve SQL for GPDB. Fixes #3150 2018-02-27 11:05:15 +00:00
Dave Page 7dbfd23797 Case sensitive paths are confusing git... 2018-02-27 11:04:34 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 6753cd7334 PEP8 fixes for the pgAgent and Tables nodes (and subnodes). Fixes #3148 2018-02-26 19:24:17 +00:00
Dave Page bcdb8eb275 Revert "Ensure we pick up the messages from the current query and not a previous one. Fixes #3094"
This reverts commit 08b3ccc01a.
It was found that this fix inadvertently re-introduces #1523
2018-02-26 16:32:53 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 43d3e0ca64 PEP8 fixes. 2018-02-26 15:58:48 +00:00
Chethana Kumar 51811a451d Update dashboard display options screenshots. 2018-02-26 15:50:39 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 08b3ccc01a Ensure we pick up the messages from the current query and not a previous one. Fixes #3094 2018-02-26 14:19:43 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala fa9aebadbd PEP8 fixes. 2018-02-26 13:54:58 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 5ebd9ee8d3 Fix table statistics for Greenplum. Fixes #3059 2018-02-26 09:38:00 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 801a2084e9 Allow dashboard tables and charts to be enabled/disabled. Fixes #2951 2018-02-26 09:20:04 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 54dd6aae83 Add a test for sequence validation. 2018-02-23 12:02:57 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 2332630af8 PEP8 fixes for the tools module. 2018-02-23 11:57:44 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 5a49fbd11f Don't use the webpack cache with production builds. 2018-02-22 17:30:14 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 55875f0cfa PEP8 cleanups for the sequences module. 2018-02-21 17:37:34 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 51cc04b5b0 Fix tablespace tests for Python 3.x. Fixes #3138 2018-02-21 17:34:18 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala f8771d5585 Fix validation of sequence parameters. Fixes #3014 2018-02-21 17:32:04 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi b49d625c2d Don't depend on standards_conforming_strings being enabled. Fixes #3077 2018-02-21 17:18:00 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira ba70634e5f Hide tablespace node on GPDB. Fixes #3107 2018-02-20 17:40:56 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira bcb6f37d6f Clarify which shortcut is being tested in the shortcut test. 2018-02-20 17:32:37 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 05e91044c7 Fix intermittent specified_version_number ValueError issue on restart. Fixes #2983
Now we try to restore server details like server version number at restart so template paths can be resolved.
2018-02-20 17:31:13 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal c91a597df9 Fix alignment issues in keyboard shortcut options. Fixes #3080 2018-02-20 16:49:59 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 9a498c2877 Ensure column names on indexes on views are properly quoted in RE-SQL. Fixes #3066 2018-02-20 16:47:33 +00:00
Dave Page 3021060a32 Fix silly typo 2018-02-20 10:58:03 +00:00
Dave Page 8148a61279 Attempt to ensure the runtime is built with the correct Python version. 2018-02-20 10:44:01 +00:00
Dave Page 8a56eb9cd0 Fix stupid thinko 2018-02-19 17:06:01 +00:00
Dave Page df667bff53 Python 3 fix for the runtime. 2018-02-19 16:30:43 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi c85e14dc25 Add missing reverse-engineered SQL header and drop statement for sequences. Fixes #3081 2018-02-19 11:41:19 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 96165044ae Ensure we can properly update rows with upper-case primary key columns. Fixes #3105 2018-02-19 11:37:31 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 4dc9fb146a Add a marker (/*pga4dash*/) to the dashboard queries to allow them to be more easily filtered from server logs. Fixes #2950 2018-02-19 11:17:42 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 7301e30ff3 Fix PEP8 issues in various modules. Fixes #3121 2018-02-19 11:12:35 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 30868614ff Show button shortcut keys in the debugger on tooltips. 2018-02-19 11:05:34 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 0677ad254a Un-vendorise React, now that it contains bug fixes we need. 2018-02-19 10:53:54 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 15862e903a Fix creation of tables and columns in GPDB. Fixes #3099 2018-02-19 10:40:10 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 1a958a3951 Fix Python 2.6 support. 2018-02-19 10:22:23 +00:00
Dave Page d5aeb8a691 Fix target name 2018-02-19 09:17:26 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 9c382e4d23 Fix tests for Python 3.x 2018-02-09 14:39:39 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 6f25f4d175 Fix PEP-8 issues in feature_tests, dashboard, about and misc module's python code. Fixes #3082 2018-02-09 12:57:37 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 942ac733a4 Configurable shortcuts in the Debugger. Fixes #2901 2018-02-09 12:43:27 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 258b064963 Add configurable shortcut keys for various common options in the main window. Fixes #2899 2018-02-09 12:07:57 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira e16a952753 Support EXPLAIN on Greenplum. Fixes #3097
- Extract SQLEditor.execute and SQLEditor._poll into their own files and add test around them
 - Extract SQLEditor backend functions that start executing query to their own files and add tests around it
 - Move the Explain SQL from the front-end and now pass the Explain plan parameters as a JSON object in the start query call.
 - Extract the compile_template_name into a function that can be used by the different places that try to select the version of the template and the server type
2018-02-09 11:54:42 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira e60a84c44f Update JS packages:
Add package:
     is-docker to select a specific setting when running the Chrome tests in Docker

Upgrade the version of:
    - babel-loader
    - extract-text-webpack-plugin
    - jasmine-core
    - jasmine-enzyme
    - moment
2018-02-09 11:09:04 +00:00
Navnath Gadakh db92907fe9 Fix quoting of function names in RE-SQL. Fixes #3060 2018-02-09 10:15:41 +00:00
Dave Page 2706d9cd8e Bump the version to 3.0, per discussion on the mailing lists 2018-02-05 15:38:20 +00:00
Dave Page 7192a2b675 Rewrite the runtime as a tray-based server which can launch a web browser. Fixes #3086 2018-02-05 15:32:14 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 25647c16ba Ensure we capture notices raised by queries. Fixes #3027 2018-02-02 15:23:33 +01:00
Dave Page 4d69764869 Don't quote variable values used by SET. It's usually going to be wrong. Fixes #3027 2018-02-02 14:58:29 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 262d01bf01 Add keyboard navigation options for the main browser windows. Fixes #2895 2018-02-02 14:28:37 +01:00
Harshal Dhumal 2042f89ce0 Don't include sizes on primitive datatypes that shouldn't have them when modifying columns. Fixes #3052 2018-02-01 16:27:36 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 6ad44cb51e Fix on-click handling of treeview nodes that wasn't refreshing SQL/Dependencies/Dependents in some circumstances. Fixes #3058 2018-02-01 14:44:12 +01:00
Harshal Dhumal e0da9c5a0c Significantly improve connection loss detection and handling in the query tool. Fixes #2815 2018-02-01 14:29:18 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c3ddb7df38 PEP8 fixes for the utils module. Fixes #3076 2018-01-31 13:58:55 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c6e405ce72 Prevent the filter dialog CodeMirror from overflowing onto the button bar of the dialog. Fixes #3067 2018-01-31 10:12:04 +00:00
Dave Page d8bd6ea885 Mask email addresses 2018-01-30 17:00:12 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala bc836aa374 Ensure the user can use keyboard shortcuts after using button controls such as Cancel, Open and Save. Fixes #3054 2018-01-29 13:43:35 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 489349b4e9 Add tools for checking PEP8 compliance. Fixes #3063 2018-01-29 12:45:32 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 393ce53d2d Fix PEP8 issues in the Tools module. Fixes #3063 2018-01-26 16:54:21 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira de1c767e88 Update the regression tests to fix issues with Python 3.5 and PG 9.2. Fixes #3057 2018-01-26 16:45:09 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala abcb8c36a3 Fix connection status indicator on IE/FF. Fixes #3046 2018-01-25 13:30:13 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 66341e6947 Add infrastructure for managing configurable keyboard shortcuts. 2018-01-25 12:49:06 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 7c985695b7 Correct display of RE-SQL for partitioned tables in Greenplum. Fixes #3050 2018-01-25 12:37:17 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 97760d65c2 Add keyboard navigation in Query tool module via Tab/Shift-Tab key. Fixes #2896
Note:
1) Once the keyboard shortcut infrastructure is ready we will add generic shortcut to focus out from CodeMirror editor and set foucs to next element, Right now there is no way of doing this, For testing purpose you can manually focus out from CodeMirror and click on data output panel to continue navigate using Tab key.
2) As of now inner panel's are not getting focused on Tab/Shift-Tab keys but once RM#2895 patch gets committed it will start working automatically as it's inherited code which will add tabindex tag automatically on each newly created wcDocker panel.
2018-01-25 12:27:13 +00:00
Chethana Kumar 5cea5f8485 Update scan and index scan EXPLAIN icons for greater clarity. Fixes #3021 2018-01-24 15:39:59 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 0e41b3364b Support keyboard navigation in the debugger. Fixes #2897
In passing, fix injection of variable values. Fixes #2981
2018-01-23 11:58:10 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 65337daeba Display functions in Greenplum. Fixes #3044 2018-01-23 11:10:46 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 678699c408 Display partitions in Greenplum. Fixes #3036 2018-01-23 10:41:36 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 8df006343b Fix feature tests following button tooltip changes. 2018-01-23 10:01:20 +00:00
Dave Page 0ec74dfa89 Modern versions of yarn don't require -- to forward options. 2018-01-22 11:29:07 +00:00
Dave Page 2b1c887945 Add missing comma to appease the linter 2018-01-22 11:28:04 +00:00
Dave Page 51cda98911 Revert "Update ESLint requirement to support --fix-dry-run"
This reverts commit 0ee9f09bbd.
2018-01-22 11:05:42 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 284adbbb90 Correctly display SQL of multiple objects on the SQL tab in GPDB. 2018-01-22 11:04:49 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi ca80cfa04a Ensure clickable images/buttons have appropriate tooltips for screen readers. Fixes #2904 2018-01-22 10:37:56 +00:00
Surinder Kumar 0ee9f09bbd Update ESLint requirement to support --fix-dry-run 2018-01-22 10:35:11 +00:00
Ashesh Vashi 404f1cc8ef Fixing the javascript file after running pga_eslint.js script 2018-01-17 13:24:25 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 4d8b7556f8 Introducing custom linter script for javascript files.
Also, changed the 'linter' yarn-command to use this script.

This script will run the 'eslint' against all the static javascripts,
found under pgadmin and regression directories of source (excepts
'vendor', 'generated'). It also allows to run the 'eslint' against
specific javascript file[s].

In order to run eslint on all static javascript files, run the following command:
  yarn run linter
  node pga_eslint

In order to run eslint on specific files, run the following command:
  yarn run linter --file <filename> [<filename>]
  node pga_script --file <filename> [<filename>]

In order to provide eslint specific commands, run the following command:
  yarn run linter [--file <filename> [<filename>]] --eslint-options
  node pga_script [--file <filename> [<filename>]] --eslint-options

  i.e.
    yarn run linter --fix
    yarn run linter --debug
    node pga_eslint --fix --debug pgadmin/static/js/pgadmin.js
2018-01-17 13:15:38 +05:30
Dave Page 55c2ab0b24 Fix typo in string. 2018-01-16 16:41:43 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala ad46d61bd3 Fix a minor UI issue on dashboard while displaying subnode control in Backgrid. Fixes #3013 2018-01-15 22:31:39 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala 03605bf9be Doc updates for connection status monitoring. 2018-01-15 18:55:36 +05:30
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira 56e922f5ab Support Properties on Greenplum databases. Fixes #3015 2018-01-15 14:44:40 +05:30
Dave Page 6f8066d261 Fix Python wheel dependencies. Fixes #3011 2018-01-15 09:15:46 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala 8520871bc6 Monitor connection and transaction status in the query tool. Fixes #2475 2018-01-12 14:34:39 +00:00
Dave Page 82aa8035c2 Refer users who want to build themselves from scratch to the README. 2018-01-12 13:37:59 +00:00
Dave Page 852a2fce84 Make the title a little more appropriate. 2018-01-12 12:58:58 +00:00
Magnus Hagander 601a7b1a5c Fix typo 2018-01-12 12:43:48 +00:00
Joao Pedro De Almeida Pereira ed3e374df6 Support server and database statistics on Greenplum. Fixes #3004 2018-01-12 10:02:46 +00:00
Ashesh Vashi c32eb6bd37 Fixed the warnings/errors reported by eslint for all the static
javascripts.
2018-01-12 13:00:14 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala b78b97d89b Ensure images in the docs have alt tags for screen readers. Fixes #2903 2018-01-11 16:58:30 +00:00
Dave Page 8b3aecd137 Don't listen on port 443 if TLS is not enabled when launching the container. Fixes #2998 2018-01-11 15:04:11 +00:00
Dave Page 405de59298 Fix name of release notes. 2018-01-10 10:45:29 +00:00
Karen Blatchley e8c05fbaa5 Add release notes for 2.1 2018-01-10 10:39:24 +00:00
Karen Blatchley 57f4131dfe Add release notes for 2.1 2018-01-10 10:38:51 +00:00
Dave Page f1e39dd20c Update version number for release. 2018-01-10 09:55:13 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi def2df9028 Fix view data for views/mat views. Fixes #2993 2018-01-10 09:32:42 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala aec86970f2 Add ALT tags to images for accessibility. Fixes #2902 2018-01-08 12:43:36 +00:00
Dave Page 89821c0d19 Update copyright notices for 2018. 2018-01-05 10:42:50 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 711fbd5144 Allow use of transition tables in PG 10 triggers. Fixes #2933 2018-01-03 16:25:03 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 0810c681c3 Ensure the switch animation is consistent on the table dialogue and avoid displaying an error incorrectly. Fixes #2624 2018-01-03 15:32:44 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c15d814268 Clear the messages tab when running EXPLAIN/EXPLAIN ANALYZE. Fixes #2974 2018-01-03 15:19:56 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala e21f1e3291 Prevent multiple connections to new slow-to-respond servers being initiated in error. Fixes #2928 2018-01-03 14:49:08 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 49dfd6fe31 Ensure invalid options can't be selected on triggers on views. Fixes #2945 2018-01-03 14:32:00 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 90629da524 Close user language preference drop down when it loses focus. Fixes #2956 2018-01-03 13:36:49 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 1dd1c10255 Do not decrypt the password when the password is 'None'. Fixes #2765
This should avoid the common but harmless exception "ValueError: IV must be 16 bytes long while decrypting the password."
2018-01-03 13:19:58 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi e64bc2a821 Show complete SQL for FTS dictionaries. Fixes #2949 2018-01-03 13:16:11 +00:00
Susan Douglas d8194e7c0f Correct the description for the host name field on the server dialogue. 2018-01-03 13:04:58 +00:00
Mark Deneen 3289a18a1a Remove any Apache HTTPD PID file before starting the container, to prevent failures during restart. 2018-01-03 12:54:52 +00:00
Neel Patel 90f5af8902 Avoid a potential crash when downloading. Fixes #2964 2017-12-19 12:20:01 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 88bcd3b512 Make the query tool datatype test easily configurable and extendable and add support for multi-dimensional arrays and enums. 2017-12-18 15:10:47 +00:00
Dave Page 6577723a2a Fix duplicate link text 2017-12-18 11:20:41 +00:00
Dave Page 005abab7c4 Runtime version update 2017-12-18 11:13:28 +00:00
Susan Douglas 10d0307834 Doc updates for server connection dialogue and related info. 2017-12-18 11:00:11 +00:00
Dave Page d44328664a Bump version for some dev builds. 2017-12-18 10:35:58 +00:00
Begina Felicysym ebd096f5cc Updated Polish translation from Begina. Extract/update/compile as well for completeness. Current status:
1480 of 1857 messages (79%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1692 of 1857 messages (91%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1827 of 1857 messages (98%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1829 of 1857 messages (98%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1435 of 1857 messages (77%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2017-12-18 10:08:03 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 3fe655e944 Allow selection of validation error text. Fixes #2954 2017-12-18 10:03:39 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala eae6f05b7c Allow files to be opened by double clicking on them. Fixes #2810 2017-12-18 09:48:14 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 36d779df5d Add tab indexes for debugger controls. 2017-12-18 09:23:11 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala bceb6aef3c Don't try to render security URLs in desktop mode. Fixes #2952. Fixes #2922 2017-12-18 09:15:36 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 937984f2dc Don't un-comment code with alt+. in the query tool. It's only supposed to respond to ctrl/cmd+. Fixes #2769 2017-12-13 15:58:00 +00:00
Susan Douglas d02a0de8c9 Preferences dialogue help update. 2017-12-13 15:47:15 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 107795db10 Ensure column collation isn't lost when changing field size. Fixes #2779 2017-12-13 15:44:10 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 96a2987ef6 Prevent attempts to select directories as files in the file dialogue. Fixes #2937 2017-12-13 15:35:08 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala c5d1fc8189 Ensure the datatype cache is updated when a domain is added. Fixes #2778 2017-12-13 15:17:17 +00:00
Dave Page b2e844c0ad Fix label inconsistency spotted by Susan. 2017-12-13 14:59:15 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 4246a3b22f Ensure password changes are successful if authenticating using a pgpass file. Fixes #2720 2017-12-13 13:28:07 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 55254a649f Re-hash the way that we handle rendering of special types such as arrays. Fixes #2782. Fixes #2822. 2017-12-13 11:53:27 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 0c5a5ba9c2 Add support for editing data in tables with OIDs but no primary keys. Fixes #2849.
This patch also updates the editor to retrieve all row values on save, thus immediately showing default values and allowing subsequent editing without a refresh.
2017-12-13 10:28:31 +00:00
Susan Douglas 61080ce513 Update query tool docs. 2017-12-11 12:01:54 +00:00
Dave Page 4bcec932a3 Correct names for the Japanese translators:
Junichi Tado
Kosuke Kida
Nozomi Anzai
2017-12-07 21:31:46 +09:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 22c38e4562 Fix a reference before assignment error in the file dialogue. Fixes #2934 2017-12-06 13:42:05 +09:00
Murtuza Zabuawala f5718b9d56 Misc fixes for the pgAgent module:
1) User was allowed to enter start date ahead of end date while scheduling a job. Fixes #2921

2) Datetime picker was not displaying in the grid (sub-node collection control). Fixes #1749

3) Fixed UI issue where validation error was not displaying properly for Datetime control.
2017-12-06 12:25:45 +09:00
Chethana Kumar c74b348bac Update EXPLAIN icons. Fixes #2936 2017-12-06 11:45:02 +09:00
Dave Page 3b7656b3d5 Push HTTPD logs to container stdout/stderr as appropriate. Fixes #2920 2017-12-05 14:23:35 +09:00
Dave Page 67f0c8a39e Add license field to package.json to stop yarn bleating. 2017-12-05 14:21:13 +09:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 7fab041623 Prevent the user pressing the select button in the file manager when it is supposed to be disabled. Fixes #2923 2017-12-05 13:43:02 +09:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 136ed0d3e2 Fix debugging of self-referencing functions. Fixes #2524 2017-12-05 13:32:06 +09:00
Murtuza Zabuawala bac9c77c4e Cleanup some inconsistent error dialog titles. Fixes #2098 2017-12-02 05:12:40 +00:00
Dave Page 7e419d1bfe Add a note to the README on creating the bundle. 2017-12-02 05:12:40 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 1a4e21e6dd Fix regression tests for password reset in server mode 2017-11-30 13:16:59 +00:00
Susan Douglas 54389595da Doc updates for resource groups and roles. 2017-11-30 12:22:22 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal f3256aef71 Don't login the user with every request in desktop mode. Just do it once. Fixes #2922 2017-11-30 12:02:41 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 35a5cf22d5 Refuse password changes (and tell the user) if the notification email cannot be sent. Fixes #2892 2017-11-30 11:16:38 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 2995d6e9c5 Fix the width of Role dialogue so tabs don't wrap. 2017-11-30 10:58:27 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 389cf01af7 Cleanup the layout of the filter data dialogue. Fixes #2924 2017-11-30 10:53:48 +00:00
Chethana Kumar 709f646f5e Add a missing screenshot, and remove personal info from another. 2017-11-30 09:50:21 +00:00
Ashesh Vashi d54c35d74f Fixing the lint error messages in javascript using 'eslint --fix'
command.
2017-11-30 13:01:41 +05:30
Akshay Joshi ea82d92e41 Do not show success message, when there is an error saving the data in
the DataGrid.

Fixes #2907
2017-11-30 13:01:30 +05:30
Akshay Joshi 281b6c91b5 Using the correct type name (along with the internal name) while
generating the query for update/insert table data (Data grid).

Modified by Ashesh for array support.

Fixes #2830
2017-11-30 13:01:30 +05:30
Murtuza Zabuawala f10733e8d4 Ensure the auto-complete selection list can display longer names. Fixes #2726 2017-11-29 11:14:24 +00:00
Maxim Zakharov 4617a90123 Add missing __init__.py to backports.csv when building the MSVC windows build. Fixes #2918 2017-11-29 09:58:57 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 362bd15c8e Format JSON/JSONB nicely when displaying it in the grid editor pop-up. Fixes #2748 2017-11-28 14:21:31 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 5bfa450a5f Allow form validation messages to be close in case the eclipse anything on the form. Fixes #2859 2017-11-28 14:10:12 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 9ae4a03784 Allow changing of the users password without leaving the app. Fixes #2891 2017-11-28 10:55:54 +00:00
Navnath Gadakh 035c134fed Cleanup properly after running the Foreign Table test cases. 2017-11-28 09:44:28 +00:00
Dave Page 10c8befb71 Illustrate how to set the default mail sender name. 2017-11-28 09:29:31 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 7db7da5b0e Display process output as it happens. Fixes #2811 2017-11-27 13:00:47 +00:00
Navnath Gadakh 80c4a3fb1a Use sufficiently long random strings in test objects to avoid conflicts. 2017-11-27 12:01:50 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala fe7cfa35df Attempt to decode database errors based on lc_messages. Fixes #2806. Fixes #2821 2017-11-27 11:53:25 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala d614c88ada Ensure we don't show the full path on the server when using virtual filesystem roots in server mode for SSL certs. Fixes #2866 2017-11-27 11:25:50 +00:00
Dave Page 542f2911a3 Revert inadvertant change to doc page 2017-11-27 11:01:14 +00:00
Chethana Kumar b8c2326764 Doc screenshot update 2017-11-27 10:58:53 +00:00
Dave Page fd077e2536 Disable the line ending check entirely in eslint, as the previous platform-specific fix doesn't work with all versions. 2017-11-23 09:34:44 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 05a00f4ac8 Make the "Save Changes" prompts in the query tool optional. Fixes #2845 2017-11-23 09:20:59 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 38f111d969 Ensure the scroll location is retains in the query tool data grid if the user changes tab and then returns. Fixes #2875 2017-11-23 09:07:46 +00:00
Maxim Zakharov 5f5c590ffd Fix bundle creation on Windows which was failing due to \r\n line endings in code mirror. Fixes #2908 2017-11-23 09:02:00 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala fdb4fa454a Honour whitespace properly in the data grid. Fixes #2880 2017-11-22 16:48:36 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 1bc318f091 Ensure newly added rows cannot be editted until we have key values. Fixes #RM2886 2017-11-22 16:38:18 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala f0db93cefd Improve clarity of the boolean checkbox. 2017-11-22 16:28:08 +00:00
Dave Page 8880826260 Fix a yarn warning: "warning From Yarn 1.0 onwards, scripts don't require "--" for options to be forwarded. In a future version, any explicit "--" will be forwarded as-is to the scripts." 2017-11-21 17:25:28 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 930dd8af1f Some browsers don't properly support tri-state checkboxes, so create our own control to handle true/false/null. Fixes #2848 2017-11-21 17:22:25 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala b284572afe Allow connections to be coloured in the treeview and query tool. Fixes #1383. Fixes #2802 2017-11-21 16:28:01 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 9212699936 When selecting an SSL cert or key, update only the expected path in the UI, not all of them. Fixes #2760. Fixes #2867 2017-11-21 15:59:44 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala dd8e2fe8a6 Quote the owner name when creating types. Fixes #2787 2017-11-21 11:32:27 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala a85538a1fc Remove the artificial limit of 4000 characters from text areas. Fixes #2877 2017-11-21 11:02:21 +00:00
Neel Patel 5b5363e2c4 _blank is the correct HTML target for anchors, not _new. Fixes #2679. 2017-11-21 10:19:11 +00:00
Dave Page 182369cbab And remove the extra semicolons. Sigh. 2017-11-20 17:15:15 +00:00
Dave Page be8d3604fb Add missing semicolons. 2017-11-20 17:12:10 +00:00
Paresh More a539147a0e Fix /NOICONS switch in the windows installer. Fixes #1366 2017-11-20 16:58:35 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala ce246ecce4 Stop Python 2.6 barfing on newer versions of Selenium 2017-11-20 16:55:54 +00:00
Paresh More 8ff753deb8 Prevent the Windows installer accepting paths containing invalid characters. Fixes #1365 2017-11-20 16:38:20 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 4568fe22f7 Decode the field separator and quote char if needed. 2017-11-20 16:28:13 +00:00
Neel Patel 8cc1a007b5 Ensure we can download large files and keep the user informed about progress. Fixes #2829. Fixes #2491. Fixes #2715 2017-11-20 14:43:34 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi 0c566f132e Allow configuration of CSV and clipboard formatting of query results. Fixes #2781 2017-11-20 13:50:47 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 2579458091 Fix support for time without timezone. Fixes #2881 2017-11-20 13:36:50 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 5fd3a7dd3d Display relevant error messages when access is denied creating a schema. Fixes #2094 2017-11-20 13:31:03 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 2f17ecba76 Update selenium version 2017-11-16 14:22:44 +00:00
Harshal Dhumal 051788d040 Fix a referenced before assignment bug in connection management. Fixes #2868 2017-11-16 12:40:00 +00:00
Dave Page afd65018db Current versions of Chrome need a newer driver for selenium tests. 2017-11-16 12:13:53 +00:00
Dave Page 3c27d2fd7e Python tests don't need to have JS dependencies installed. 2017-11-16 12:01:22 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 537f6f0ab1 Display long names appropriately in dialogue headers. Fixes #2278 2017-11-16 11:56:05 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala af2722faa3 Focus on the filter textarea when opening filter options in the query tool. 2017-11-16 11:01:40 +00:00
Dave Page cf1440f41d Properly set the hostname for SSL use in containers. 2017-11-16 09:54:44 +00:00
Neel Patel 96df3147d6 Check and attempt to fir the registry on Windows, if the text/css type is misconfigured. Fixes #2716 2017-11-15 16:33:24 +00:00
Alexander Lakhin 8f070f6095 Fix utility output capture encoding. Fixes #2854 2017-11-09 08:51:56 -05:00
Alexander Lakhin 3e1caa61e1 Russian translation update. 2017-11-09 08:45:56 -05:00
Dave Page 35b57477de Remove data grid icon for consistency with other menu options. 2017-11-07 21:20:01 -05:00
Murtuza Zabuawala be0e637718 Prevent error messages covering the last row in a grid. Fixes #2850 2017-11-07 21:07:30 -05:00
Khushboo Vashi 88cd68c2b9 Add an option to manually count rows in tables to render the properties. Fixes #2846 2017-11-07 20:27:10 -05:00
Neel Patel 8a4b2ea953 Confirm with the user before exiting the runtime. Fixes #2443 2017-11-07 20:10:55 -05:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 8b543a58fe Fix a number of graphical explain rendering issues. Fixes #2824. Fixes #2842. Fixes #2843. 2017-11-06 19:59:01 -05:00
Alexander Lakhin 187ab22d90 Further missing translation fixes. Stats now:
1481 of 1831 messages (80%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1694 of 1831 messages (92%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1748 of 1831 messages (95%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1750 of 1831 messages (95%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1436 of 1831 messages (78%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2017-11-06 19:49:20 -05:00
Chethana Kumar 2be418706d Updated colours of tree view icons, which is to be more comfortable in identifying. 2017-11-06 13:03:03 +05:30
Begina Felicysym 62e70f3c4f Update Polish translation.
1748 of 1750 messages (99%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2017-11-05 08:36:24 -05:00
Alexander Lakhin f15f46592a Tag some translations that were not, well, tagged. Current stats:
1481 of 1777 messages (83%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1694 of 1777 messages (95%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1472 of 1777 messages (82%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1750 of 1777 messages (98%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1436 of 1777 messages (80%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2017-11-05 08:32:26 -05:00
Dave Page b2186db562 Revert "Fix a number of cases where strings were not properly marked for translation."
This reverts commit 1f23838a4c due to unintended side
effects it caused - specifically, expanding Databases on the treeview displayed
Servers again
2017-11-03 16:45:20 +00:00
Alexander Lakhin 1f23838a4c Fix a number of cases where strings were not properly marked for translation. 2017-11-03 13:10:42 +00:00
Khushboo Vashi f73ce2dfc3 Ensure estimated rows are included correctly in CREATE script for functions. Fixes #2651 2017-11-02 09:47:31 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 897bf4857a Fix counted rows display in table properties. Fixes #2836 2017-11-02 09:35:44 +00:00
Alexander Lakhin 2dcd2cc77f Update Russian translation. 2017-11-01 20:23:59 +00:00
Dave Page 70d31be496 Another message catalog update. Stats:
1481 of 1750 messages (84%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1694 of 1750 messages (96%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1472 of 1750 messages (84%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1706 of 1750 messages (97%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1436 of 1750 messages (82%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2017-11-01 15:19:19 +00:00
Alexander Lakhin 23d431fb54 Remove more exclamation marks from error messages. 2017-11-01 15:18:07 +00:00
Dave Page 635d944e03 Message catalog update. Current stats look like:
1503 of 1756 messages (85%) translated in pgadmin/translations/de/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1716 of 1756 messages (97%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ja/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1494 of 1756 messages (85%) translated in pgadmin/translations/pl/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1728 of 1756 messages (98%) translated in pgadmin/translations/ru/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
1458 of 1756 messages (83%) translated in pgadmin/translations/zh/LC_MESSAGES/messages.po
2017-11-01 13:01:02 +00:00
Alexander Lakhin 9be1364d1a Various string improvements and fixes. 2017-11-01 12:58:19 +00:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 714a429879 Update psycopg2 requirement to ensure 10.x+ features work. 2017-11-01 12:45:00 +00:00
Dave Page 45be22b00e Output statistics when compiling messages 2017-10-31 09:16:47 +00:00
Dave Page 6a5ac730a0 Update translations 2017-10-31 09:10:17 +00:00
Alexander Lakhin 706ef38e95 Add a Russian translation 2017-10-31 09:10:00 +00:00
Alexander Lakhin 87549e0936 Add a Russian translation 2017-10-31 09:09:00 +00:00
Alexander Lakhin 8860bc3c3e Saved user language was not being picked up in case of non-server mode.
Because - the get_locale(...) function was being executed before any
request, and user login after first request. Hence - the values for
the labels in the Preferences are not being translated properly.

Fetch the raw value of user_language from configuration in case of
runtime/non-server mode to fix the issue.
2017-10-30 18:20:41 +05:30
Dave Page bc0320d21e Add a Japanese translation created by:
Junichi Tado
Nozomi Amzai
Kouske Kida
2017-10-27 14:00:09 +02:00
Dave Page 61e809b636 Update message catalogs. 2017-10-27 13:59:03 +02:00
Alexander Lakhin 0a1cf30abb Return the translations, and not empty array from the
'translations.js'.

It was regression of the commit-id:
4a91bcde30
2017-10-24 18:50:26 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi c53c6d2f48 Using 'categroy_id' instead of 'cid' in the preferences Backbone.Model,
as it is used by the Backbone.Collection to get the object by id.
2017-10-24 18:47:36 +05:30
Ashesh Vashi 8adf005ef8 Allow to send error, and warning on console from the javascript modules. 2017-10-24 16:56:17 +05:30
Dave Page a2c4fb02bc Show how the config/storage directory can be mounted on the host under docker. 2017-10-16 16:10:15 +01:00
Dave Page a9f10ddad1 Update yarn lock file. 2017-10-16 16:01:45 +01:00
Dave Page 890fece73a Fix check constraint regression tests. 2017-10-16 16:01:07 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 784f3f59d8 Fix name of 'check-constraints' to follow the usual singular convention. 2017-10-16 15:40:15 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 0cb57848f8 Ensure auto-indent honours the spaces/tabs config setting. Fixes #2780 2017-10-16 15:37:03 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala ce5f5015b3 Use HTTPS for accessing help docs. 2017-10-16 09:21:02 +01:00
Dave Page 845b296aed Add optional TLS support to the docker container. 2017-10-12 16:16:02 +01:00
Dave Page a8a2947da6 Remove the runtime zoom shortcuts from the SQL Editor shortcuts section. 2017-10-12 10:12:55 +01:00
Neel Patel 56e1fd85f4 Ensure line numbers form CodeMirror don't appear on top of menus. Fixes #2738 2017-10-12 10:07:18 +01:00
Dave Page cd7d80b650 Add a target for building PDF docs. 2017-10-11 14:57:58 +01:00
Dave Page 1f4a814e72 Remove some unused index directives. 2017-10-11 11:57:59 +01:00
Harshal Dhumal 04beec1309 Fix various issues that could cause an exception on startup. Fixes #2713 2017-10-10 09:50:47 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 2f5a2b2392 Only allow specification of a pgpass file if libpq >= 10. Fixes #2768 2017-10-10 09:31:27 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala 63103c7a48 Remove panels for www.pgadmin.org and www.postgresql.org as they won't work with X-Frame-Options: SAMEORIGIN which is used now. 2017-10-10 09:16:23 +01:00
Khushboo Vashi 91406d2879 Ensure HTMLMIN is only used with Python 2.7+ 2017-10-10 09:14:23 +01:00
Murtuza Zabuawala f2929046fa Refactor to remove duplicate code for the cancel/terminate buttons in the dashboard. 2017-10-09 09:18:46 +01:00
Dave Page cb25bb0e93 Add missing date. 2017-10-05 16:11:24 +01:00
2256 changed files with 190461 additions and 137645 deletions

No files matched your search

+5 -1
View File
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ runtime/.qmake.stash
runtime/Makefile
runtime/Makefile.Debug
runtime/Makefile.Release
runtime/moc_BrowserWindow.cpp
runtime/moc_TrayIcon.cpp
runtime/moc_Server.cpp
runtime/pgAdmin4.app/
runtime/pgAdmin4.pro.user*
@@ -36,6 +36,10 @@ runtime/pgAdmin4_resource.rc
runtime/release/
runtime/ui_BrowserWindow.h
web/config_local.py
web/geckodriver.log
web/regression/test_config.json
node_modules/
web/pgAdmin/static/js/generated
web/pgadmin/static/js/generated
web/yarn-error.log
/web/cacert.pem
+19 -19
View File
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
pgAdmin 4
Copyright (c) 2013 - 2017, The pgAdmin Development Team
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose, without fee, and without a written agreement is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph and
the following two paragraphs appear in all copies.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PGADMIN DEVELOPMENT TEAM BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST
PROFITS, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF
THE PGADMIN DEVELOPMENT TEAM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE PGADMIN DEVELOPMENT TEAM SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND
THE PGADMIN DEVELOPMENT TEAM HAS NO OBLIGATIONS TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT,
UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
pgAdmin 4
Copyright (C) 2013 - 2018, The pgAdmin Development Team
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose, without fee, and without a written agreement is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph and
the following two paragraphs appear in all copies.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE PGADMIN DEVELOPMENT TEAM BE LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING LOST
PROFITS, ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF
THE PGADMIN DEVELOPMENT TEAM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
THE PGADMIN DEVELOPMENT TEAM SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND
THE PGADMIN DEVELOPMENT TEAM HAS NO OBLIGATIONS TO PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT,
UPDATES, ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
-478
View File
@@ -1,478 +0,0 @@
@ECHO off
SETLOCAL
REM
REM ****************************************************************
SET WD=%CD%
SET "PGBUILDPATH=%WD%\win-build"
SET CMDOPTION=""
IF "%1" == "clean" SET CMDOPTION="VALID"
IF "%1" == "x86" SET CMDOPTION="VALID"
IF NOT %CMDOPTION%=="VALID" ( GOTO USAGE )
SET ARCHITECTURE=%1
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="clean" (
GOTO CLEAN_RELEASE
GOTO EXIT
)
REM Main Functions
CALL :SET_PGADMIN4_ENVIRONMENT
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :VALIDATE_ENVIRONMENT
CALL :CLEAN_RELEASE
CALL :CREATE_VIRTUAL_ENV
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :CREATE_RUNTIME_ENV
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :CREATE_PYTHON_ENV
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :CLEANUP_ENV
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :CREATE_INSTALLER
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :SIGN_INSTALLER
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CD %WD%
GOTO EXIT
REM Main function Ends
:CLEAN_RELEASE
ECHO Calling clean target...
IF EXIST "%PGBUILDPATH%" rd "%PGBUILDPATH%" /S /Q
FOR /R "%WD%" %%f in (*.pyc *.pyo) do DEL /q "%%f" > nul
IF EXIST "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output" rd "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output" /S /Q
IF EXIST DEL /q "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss" > nul
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:SET_PGADMIN4_ENVIRONMENT
IF "%PYTHON_HOME%" == "" SET "PYTHON_HOME=C:\Python27"
IF "%PYTHON_DLL%" == "" SET "PYTHON_DLL=C:\Windows\SysWOW64\python27.dll"
IF "%QTDIR%" == "" SET "QTDIR=C:\Qt\5.8\mingw53_32"
IF "%PGDIR%" == "" SET "PGDIR=C:\Program Files (x86)\PostgreSQL\9.6"
IF "%INNOTOOL%" == "" SET "INNOTOOL=C:\Program Files (x86)\Inno Setup 5"
IF "%VCDIR%" == "" SET "VCDIR=C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC"
IF "%VCREDIST%" == "" SET "VCREDIST=C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC\redist\1033\vcredist_x86.exe"
IF "%SIGNTOOL%" == "" SET "SIGNTOOL=C:\Program Files\Microsoft SDKs\Windows\v7.1A\Bin\signtool.exe"
SET "VCREDISTNAME=vcredist_x86.exe"
GOTO:eof
:VALIDATE_ENVIRONMENT
REM SET the variables IF not availalbe in windows environment
SET "QMAKE=%QTDIR%\bin\qmake.exe"
SET "VIRTUALENV=venv"
SET "TARGETINSTALLER=%WD%\dist"
SET "VCREDIST=%VCDIR%\redist\1033\%VCREDISTNAME%"
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_RELEASE =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_RELEASE=%%a
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_REVISION =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_REVISION_VERSION=%%a
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_SUFFIX =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_SUFFIX_VERSION=%%a
REM remove single quote from the string
SET APP_SUFFIX_VERSION=%APP_SUFFIX_VERSION:'=%
SET APP_NAME=""
FOR /F "tokens=2* DELims='" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_NAME =" web\config.py') DO SET APP_NAME=%%a
FOR /f "tokens=1 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "print('%APP_NAME%'.lower().replace(' ', ''))"') DO SET APP_SHORTNAME=%%G
FOR /F "tokens=4,5 delims=. " %%a IN ('%QMAKE% -v ^| findstr /B /C:"Using Qt version "') DO SET QT_VERSION=%%a.%%b
SET INSTALLERNAME=%APP_SHORTNAME%-%APP_RELEASE%.%APP_REVISION_VERSION%-%APP_SUFFIX_VERSION%-%ARCHITECTURE%.exe
IF "%APP_SUFFIX_VERSION%" == "" SET INSTALLERNAME=%APP_SHORTNAME%-%APP_RELEASE%.%APP_REVISION_VERSION%-%ARCHITECTURE%.exe
SET PGADMIN4_VERSION=v%APP_RELEASE%
SET PGADMIN4_APP_VERSION=%APP_RELEASE%.%APP_REVISION_VERSION%
ECHO ****************************************************************
ECHO S U M M A R Y
ECHO ****************************************************************
ECHO Target mode = x86
ECHO INNOTOOL = %INNOTOOL%
ECHO VCDIR = %VCDIR%
ECHO VCDIST = %VCREDIST%
ECHO SIGNTOOL = %SIGNTOOL%
ECHO QTDIR = %QTDIR%
ECHO QMAKE = %QMAKE%
ECHO QT_VERSION = %QT_VERSION%
ECHO BROWSER = QtWebKit
ECHO PYTHON_HOME = %PYTHON_HOME%
ECHO PYTHON_DLL = %PYTHON_DLL%
ECHO PGDIR = %PGDIR%
ECHO ****************************************************************
REM Check IF path SET in enviroments really exist or not ?
IF NOT EXIST "%INNOTOOL%" GOTO err_handle_inno
IF NOT EXIST "%VCDIR%" GOTO err_handle_visualstudio
IF NOT EXIST "%VCREDIST%" GOTO err_handle_visualstudio_dist
IF NOT EXIST "%QTDIR%" GOTO err_handle_qt
IF NOT EXIST "%QMAKE%" GOTO err_handle_qt
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_HOME%" GOTO err_handle_python
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_DLL%" GOTO err_handle_python
IF NOT EXIST "%PGDIR%" GOTO err_handle_pg
REM get Python version ex. 2.7.1 will get as 27
FOR /f "tokens=1 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "import sys; print(sys.version.split(' ')[0])"') DO SET PYTHON_MAJOR=%%G
FOR /f "tokens=2 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "import sys; print(sys.version.split(' ')[0])"') DO SET PYTHON_MINOR=%%G
SET "PYTHON_VERSION=%PYTHON_MAJOR%%PYTHON_MINOR%"
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_HOME%\Scripts\virtualenv.exe" GOTO err_handle_pythonvirtualenv
SET PATH=%PGDIR%;%PGDIR%\bin;%PATH%
GOTO:eof
:CREATE_VIRTUAL_ENV
ECHO Creating Virtual Enviroment...
IF NOT EXIST "%PGBUILDPATH%" MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%"
CD "%PGBUILDPATH%"
"%PYTHON_HOME%\Scripts\virtualenv.exe" "%VIRTUALENV%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Activating Virtual Enviroment - %PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate...
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate"
SET PATH=%PGDIR%\bin;%PATH%
ECHO Installing dependencies...
pip install -r "%WD%\requirements.txt"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
pip install sphinx
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Virtual Environment created successfully.
ECHO Deactivating Virtual Enviroment - %PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\deactivate...
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\deactivate"
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:CREATE_RUNTIME_ENV
ECHO Compiling source code...
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul
REM --- Processing WEB ---
CD "%WD%\web"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Install Javascript dependencies
call yarn install
ECHO Bundle all Javascript
call yarn run bundle
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%WD%\web" "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
REM Clean up .pyc, .pyo, pgadmin4.db, config_local.py
ECHO Cleaning up unnecessary files...
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" %%f in (*.pyc *.pyo) do DEL /q "%%f"
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" %%f in (tests feature_tests __pycache__ node_modules) do RD /Q /S "%%f"
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\regression"
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\tools"
DEL /q "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\pgadmin4.db"
DEL /q "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_local.py"
ECHO Creating config_distro.py
ECHO SERVER_MODE = False > "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO HELP_PATH = '../../../docs/en_US/html/' >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO DEFAULT_BINARY_PATHS = { >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO 'pg': '$DIR/../runtime', >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO 'ppas': '' >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO } >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO Activating Virtual Enviroment - %PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate...
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate"
ECHO Building docs...
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\docs\en_US\html"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CD "%WD%\docs\en_US"
"%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\python.exe" build_code_snippet.py
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
"%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\sphinx-build.exe" "%WD%\docs\en_US" "%PGBUILDPATH%\docs\en_US\html"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Removing Sphinx
pip uninstall -y sphinx Pygments alabaster colorama docutils imagesize requests snowballstemmer
ECHO Fixing backports.csv - adding missing __init__.py
type nul >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Lib\site-packages\backports\__init__.py"
ECHO Assembling runtime environment...
CD "%WD%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL "%QMAKE%" "DEFINES+=PGADMIN4_USE_WEBKIT"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL mingw32-make.exe clean
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL mingw32-make.exe
IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERR_HANDLER
REM Copy binary to Release Folder
copy "%WD%\runtime\release\pgAdmin4.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERR_HANDLER
REM Copy QT dependences
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Core.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Sql.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Gui.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Qml.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5OpenGL.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Quick.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Sensors.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Widgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Network.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Multimedia.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebChannel.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Positioning.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5PrintSupport.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5MultimediaWidgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
IF %QT_VERSION% GEQ 5.9 (
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebKit.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebKitWidgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
) ELSE (
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\libQt5WebKit.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\libQt5WebKitWidgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
)
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\icudt57.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\icuin57.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\icuuc57.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\libgcc_s_dw2-1.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\libstdc++-6.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\libwinpthread-1.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\libxml2-2.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\libxslt-1.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\platforms"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\plugins\platforms\qwindows.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\platforms" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO [Paths] > "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\qt.conf"
ECHO Plugins=plugins >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\qt.conf"
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\libpq.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\ssleay32.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\libeay32.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\libintl-*.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\libiconv-*.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\zlib1.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_dump.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_dumpall.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_restore.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\psql.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\installer"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%VCREDIST%" "%PGBUILDPATH%\installer" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Runtime built successfully.
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:CREATE_PYTHON_ENV
copy %PYTHON_DLL% "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
REM Copy Python interpretor as it's needed to run background processes
copy %PYTHON_HOME%\python.exe "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy %PYTHON_HOME%\pythonw.exe "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%PYTHON_HOME%\DLLs" "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\DLLs" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%PYTHON_HOME%\Lib" "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Lib" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Cleaning up unnecessary files...
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%" %%f in (*.pyc *.pyo) do DEL /q "%%f"
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Lib" %%f in (test tests) do RD /Q /S "%%f"
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\tcl"
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:CREATE_INSTALLER
ECHO Preparing for creation of windows installer...
IF NOT EXIST "%TARGETINSTALLER%" MKDIR "%TARGETINSTALLER%"
copy "%WD%\pkg\win32\Resources\pgAdmin4.ico" "%PGBUILDPATH%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CD "%WD%"
CD pkg
CD win32
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage1" "-s" MYAPP_NAME -r """%APP_NAME%"""
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage1" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage2" "-s" MYAPP_FULLVERSION -r """%PGADMIN4_APP_VERSION%"""
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage2" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage3" "-s" MYAPP_VERSION -r """%PGADMIN4_VERSION%"""
set ARCMODE=
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="amd64" (
set ARCMODE="x64"
)
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage3" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage4" "-s" MYAPP_ARCHITECTURESMODE -r """%ARCMODE%"""
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage4" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss" "-s" MYAPP_VCDIST -r """%VCREDISTNAME%"""
DEL /s "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage*" > nul
ECHO Creating windows installer... using INNO tool
CALL "%INNOTOOL%\ISCC.exe" /q "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
MOVE "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output\Setup.exe" "%TARGETINSTALLER%\%INSTALLERNAME%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO "Location - %TARGETINSTALLER%\%INSTALLERNAME%"
ECHO Installer generated successfully.
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:SIGN_INSTALLER
ECHO Attempting to sign the installer...
"%SIGNTOOL%" sign /t http://timestamp.verisign.com/scripts/timstamp.dll "%TARGETINSTALLER%\%INSTALLERNAME%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 (
ECHO
ECHO ************************************************************
ECHO * Failed to sign the installer
ECHO ************************************************************
PAUSE
)
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:CLEANUP_ENV
ECHO Cleaning up private environment...
rd "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Include" /S /Q
DEL /s "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\pip-selfcheck.json"
ECHO Cleaned up private environment successfully.
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:err_handle_inno
ECHO %INNOTOOL% does not exist
ECHO Please Install Innotool and SET INNOTOOL enviroment Variable.
ECHO SET "INNOTOOL=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_visualstudio
ECHO %VCDIR% does not exist
ECHO Please Install Microsoft Visual studio and SET the VCDIR enviroment Variable.
ECHO SET "VCDIR=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_visualstudio_dist
ECHO %VCREDIST% does not exist
ECHO Please Install Microsoft Visual studio and SET the VCDIST enviroment Variable.
ECHO SET "VCDIST=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_python
ECHO %PYTHON_HOME% does not exist, or
ECHO PYTHON_VERSION is not SET, or
ECHO %PYTHON_DLL% does not exist.
ECHO Please install Python and SET the PYTHON_HOME enviroment Variable.
ECHO SET "PYTHON_VERSION=<VERSION NUMBER>"
ECHO SET "PYTHON_HOME=<PATH>"
ECHO SET "PYTHON_DLL=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_qt
ECHO %QTDIR% does not exist.
ECHO Please Install QT SDK and SET the QTDIR enviroment variable.
ECHO SET "QTDIR=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_pg
ECHO %PGDIR% does not exist.
ECHO Please Install Postgres and SET enviroment Variable
ECHO SET "PGDIR=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_pythonvirtualenv
ECHO Python virtualenv is missing @ location - %PYTHON_HOME%\Scripts\virtualenv.exe
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:ERR_HANDLER
ECHO.
ECHO Aborting build!
CD %WD%
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:USAGE
ECHO Invalid command line options....
ECHO Usage: "Make.bat <x86 | clean>"
ECHO.
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:EXIT
+383 -601
View File
@@ -1,601 +1,383 @@
@ECHO off
SETLOCAL
REM
REM ****************************************************************
SET WD=%CD%
SET "PGBUILDPATH=%WD%\win-build"
SET CMDOPTION=""
IF "%1" == "clean" SET CMDOPTION="VALID"
IF "%1" == "x86" SET CMDOPTION="VALID"
IF "%1" == "amd64" SET CMDOPTION="VALID"
IF NOT %CMDOPTION%=="VALID" ( GOTO USAGE )
SET ARCHITECTURE=%1
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="clean" (
GOTO CLEAN_RELEASE
GOTO EXIT
)
REM Main Functions
CALL :SET_PGADMIN4_ENVIRONMENT
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :VALIDATE_ENVIRONMENT
CALL :CLEAN_RELEASE
CALL :CREATE_VIRTUAL_ENV
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :CREATE_RUNTIME_ENV
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :CREATE_PYTHON_ENV
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :CLEANUP_ENV
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :CREATE_INSTALLER
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL :SIGN_INSTALLER
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CD %WD%
GOTO EXIT
REM Main function Ends
:CLEAN_RELEASE
ECHO Calling clean target...
IF EXIST "%PGBUILDPATH%" rd "%PGBUILDPATH%" /S /Q
FOR /R "%WD%" %%f in (*.pyc *.pyo) do DEL /q "%%f" > nul
IF EXIST "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output" rd "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output" /S /Q
IF EXIST DEL /q "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss" > nul
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:SET_PGADMIN4_ENVIRONMENT
REM Check os architecture x86 or amd64
SET RegQry=HKLM\Hardware\Description\System\CentralProcessor\0
REG.exe Query %RegQry% > checkOS.txt
Find /i "x86" < CheckOS.txt > StringCheck.txt
SET OSTYPE=""
IF %ERRORLEVEL% == 0 (
SET OSTYPE=x86
) else (
SET OSTYPE=amd64
)
DEL CheckOS.txt StringCheck.txt
SET OSVALUE=""
IF "%OSTYPE%"=="x86" (
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="amd64" (
ECHO ARCHITECTURE - %ARCHITECTURE% cannot be run on 32 bit machine
GOTO EXIT
)
SET OSVALUE=%OSTYPE%
)
REM Check IF its is windows 32 bit machine and selected architecture is x86
IF %OSVALUE%=="x86" (
IF "%PYTHON_HOME%" == "" SET "PYTHON_HOME=C:\Python27"
IF "%PYTHON_DLL%" == "" SET "PYTHON_DLL=C:\Windows\System32\python27.dll"
IF "%QTDIR%" == "" SET "QTDIR=C:\Qt\5.7\msvc2013"
IF "%PGDIR%" == "" SET "PGDIR=C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.6"
IF "%INNOTOOL%" == "" SET "INNOTOOL=C:\Program Files\Inno Setup 5"
IF "%VCDIR%" == "" SET "VCDIR=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC"
SET "VCREDISTNAME=vcredist_x86.exe"
)
REM Check IF its is windows 64 bit machine and selected architecture is x86 or amd64
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="x86" (
IF "%PYTHON_HOME%" == "" SET "PYTHON_HOME=C:\Python27"
IF "%PYTHON_DLL%" == "" SET "PYTHON_DLL=C:\Windows\SysWOW64\python27.dll"
IF "%QTDIR%" == "" SET "QTDIR=C:\Qt\5.7\msvc2013"
IF "%PGDIR%" == "" SET "PGDIR=C:\Program Files (x86)\PostgreSQL\9.6"
IF "%INNOTOOL%" == "" SET "INNOTOOL=C:\Program Files (x86)\Inno Setup 5"
IF "%VCDIR%" == "" SET "VCDIR=C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC"
IF "%VCREDIST%" == "" SET "VCREDIST=C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC\redist\1033\vcredist_x86.exe"
SET "VCREDISTNAME=vcredist_x86.exe"
)
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="amd64" (
IF "%PYTHON_HOME%" == "" SET "PYTHON_HOME=C:\Python27-x64"
IF "%PYTHON_DLL%" == "" SET "PYTHON_DLL=C:\Windows\System32\python27.dll"
IF "%QTDIR%" == "" SET "QTDIR=C:\Qt\5.7\msvc2013"
IF "%PGDIR%" == "" SET "PGDIR=C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.6"
IF "%INNOTOOL%" == "" SET "INNOTOOL=C:\Program Files\Inno Setup 5"
IF "%VCDIR%" == "" SET "VCDIR=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC"
IF "%VCREDIST%" == "" SET "VCREDIST=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC\redist\1033\vcredist_x64.exe"
SET "VCREDISTNAME=vcredist_x64.exe"
)
GOTO:eof
:VALIDATE_ENVIRONMENT
REM SET the variables IF not availalbe in windows environment
SET "VCVAR=%VCDIR%\vcvarsall.bat"
SET "VCNMAKE=%VCDIR%\bin\nmake.exe"
SET "QMAKE=%QTDIR%\bin\qmake.exe"
SET "VIRTUALENV=venv"
SET "TARGETINSTALLER=%WD%\dist"
SET "VCREDIST=%VCDIR%\redist\1033\%VCREDISTNAME%"
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_RELEASE =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_RELEASE=%%a
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_REVISION =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_REVISION_VERSION=%%a
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_SUFFIX =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_SUFFIX_VERSION=%%a
REM remove single quote from the string
SET APP_SUFFIX_VERSION=%APP_SUFFIX_VERSION:'=%
SET APP_NAME=""
FOR /F "tokens=2* DELims='" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_NAME =" web\config.py') DO SET APP_NAME=%%a
FOR /f "tokens=1 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "print('%APP_NAME%'.lower().replace(' ', ''))"') DO SET APP_SHORTNAME=%%G
FOR /F "tokens=4,5 delims=. " %%a IN ('%QMAKE% -v ^| findstr /B /C:"Using Qt version "') DO SET QT_VERSION=%%a.%%b
SET INSTALLERNAME=%APP_SHORTNAME%-%APP_RELEASE%.%APP_REVISION_VERSION%-%APP_SUFFIX_VERSION%-%ARCHITECTURE%.exe
IF "%APP_SUFFIX_VERSION%" == "" SET INSTALLERNAME=%APP_SHORTNAME%-%APP_RELEASE%.%APP_REVISION_VERSION%-%ARCHITECTURE%.exe
SET PGADMIN4_VERSION=v%APP_RELEASE%
SET PGADMIN4_APP_VERSION=%APP_RELEASE%.%APP_REVISION_VERSION%
ECHO ****************************************************************
ECHO S U M M A R Y
ECHO ****************************************************************
ECHO Target mode = %ARCHITECTURE%
ECHO INNOTOOL = %INNOTOOL%
ECHO VCDIR = %VCDIR%
ECHO VCDIST = %VCREDIST%
ECHO NMAKE = %VCNMAKE%
ECHO QTDIR = %QTDIR%
ECHO QMAKE = %QMAKE%
ECHO QT_VERSION = %QT_VERSION%
IF %QT_VERSION% GEQ 5.5 (
ECHO BROWSER = QtWebEngine
) ELSE (
ECHO BROWSER = QtWebKit
)
ECHO PYTHON_HOME = %PYTHON_HOME%
ECHO PYTHON_DLL = %PYTHON_DLL%
ECHO PGDIR = %PGDIR%
ECHO ****************************************************************
REM Check IF path SET in enviroments really exist or not ?
IF NOT EXIST "%INNOTOOL%" GOTO err_handle_inno
IF NOT EXIST "%VCDIR%" GOTO err_handle_visualstudio
IF NOT EXIST "%VCREDIST%" GOTO err_handle_visualstudio_dist
IF NOT EXIST "%VCVAR%" GOTO err_handle_visualstudio
IF NOT EXIST "%VCNMAKE%" GOTO err_handle_visualstudio
IF NOT EXIST "%QTDIR%" GOTO err_handle_qt
IF NOT EXIST "%QMAKE%" GOTO err_handle_qt
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_HOME%" GOTO err_handle_python
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_DLL%" GOTO err_handle_python
IF NOT EXIST "%PGDIR%" GOTO err_handle_pg
REM Check for QT and VC dependences
FOR /L %%G IN (15,1,19) DO "%VCDIR%\bin\cl.exe" /? 2>&1 | findstr /C:"Version %%G" > nul && SET MSVC_MAJOR_VERSION=%%G
IF %MSVC_MAJOR_VERSION%==19 SET QT_MSVC_PATH=msvc2015
IF %MSVC_MAJOR_VERSION%==18 SET QT_MSVC_PATH=msvc2013
IF %MSVC_MAJOR_VERSION%==17 SET QT_MSVC_PATH=msvc2012
IF %MSVC_MAJOR_VERSION%==16 SET QT_MSVC_PATH=msvc2010
IF %MSVC_MAJOR_VERSION%==15 SET QT_MSVC_PATH=msvc2008
REM on 64 bit machine if x86 is selected and QTDIR is set to 64 bit is should not allow
IF "%OSTYPE%"=="amd64" (
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="x86" (
echo "%QTDIR%" | findstr /C:"_64" > nul && ( GOTO err_handle_qt_compactissue )
)
)
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="amd64" (
SET QT_MSVC_PATH=%QT_MSVC_PATH%_64
)
IF NOT EXIST "%QTDIR%\..\%QT_MSVC_PATH%" GOTO err_handle_qt_mismatch
REM get Python version ex. 2.7.1 will get as 27
FOR /f "tokens=1 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "import sys; print(sys.version.split(' ')[0])"') DO SET PYTHON_MAJOR=%%G
FOR /f "tokens=2 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "import sys; print(sys.version.split(' ')[0])"') DO SET PYTHON_MINOR=%%G
SET "PYTHON_VERSION=%PYTHON_MAJOR%%PYTHON_MINOR%"
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_HOME%\Scripts\virtualenv.exe" GOTO err_handle_pythonvirtualenv
SET PATH=%PGDIR%;%PGDIR%\bin;%PATH%
GOTO:eof
:CREATE_VIRTUAL_ENV
ECHO Creating Virtual Enviroment...
IF NOT EXIST "%PGBUILDPATH%" MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%"
CD "%PGBUILDPATH%"
"%PYTHON_HOME%\Scripts\virtualenv.exe" "%VIRTUALENV%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Activating Virtual Enviroment - %PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate...
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate"
SET PATH=%PGDIR%\bin;%PATH%
ECHO Installing dependencies...
pip install -r "%WD%\requirements.txt"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
pip install sphinx
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Virtual Environment created successfully.
ECHO Deactivating Virtual Enviroment - %PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\deactivate...
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\deactivate"
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:CREATE_RUNTIME_ENV
ECHO Compiling source code...
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul
REM --- Processing WEB ---
CD "%WD%\web"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Install Javascript dependencies
call yarn install
ECHO Bundle all Javascript
call yarn run bundle
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%WD%\web" "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
REM Clean up .pyc, .pyo, pgadmin4.db, config_local.py
ECHO Cleaning up unnecessary files...
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" %%f in (*.pyc *.pyo) do DEL /q "%%f"
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" %%f in (tests feature_tests __pycache__ node_modules) do RD /Q /S "%%f"
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\regression"
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\tools"
DEL /q "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\pgadmin4.db"
DEL /q "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_local.py"
ECHO Creating config_distro.py
ECHO SERVER_MODE = False > "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO HELP_PATH = '../../../docs/en_US/html/' >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO DEFAULT_BINARY_PATHS = { >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO 'pg': '$DIR/../runtime', >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO 'ppas': '' >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO } >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO Activating Virtual Enviroment - %PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate...
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate"
ECHO Building docs...
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\docs\en_US\html"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CD "%WD%\docs\en_US"
"%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\python.exe" build_code_snippet.py
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
"%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\sphinx-build.exe" "%WD%\docs\en_US" "%PGBUILDPATH%\docs\en_US\html"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Removing Sphinx
pip uninstall -y sphinx Pygments alabaster colorama docutils imagesize requests snowballstemmer
ECHO Assembling runtime environment...
CD "%WD%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL "%VCVAR%" %ARCHITECTURE%
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL "%QMAKE%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL "%VCNMAKE%" clean
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CALL "%VCNMAKE%"
IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERR_HANDLER
REM Copy binary to Release Folder
copy "%WD%\runtime\release\pgAdmin4.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF ERRORLEVEL 1 GOTO ERR_HANDLER
REM Copy QT dependences
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Core.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Sql.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Gui.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Qml.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5OpenGL.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Quick.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Sensors.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Widgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Network.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Multimedia.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebChannel.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Positioning.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5PrintSupport.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5MultimediaWidgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
REM Install the appropriate browser components. We use QtWebEngine with Qt 5.5+
IF %QT_VERSION% GEQ 5.7 (
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5QuickWidgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
)
IF %QT_VERSION% GEQ 5.7 (
copy "%QTDIR%\resources\icudtl.dat" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\resources\qtwebengine_resources.pak" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\resources\qtwebengine_devtools_resources.pak" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\resources\qtwebengine_resources_100p.pak" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\resources\qtwebengine_resources_200p.pak" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebEngine.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebEngineCore.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebEngineWidgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\QtWebEngineProcess.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\opengl32sw.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
) ELSE (
IF %QT_VERSION% GEQ 5.5 (
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\icudt54.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\icuin54.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\icuuc54.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\icudtl.dat" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\qtwebengine_resources.pak" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\qtwebengine_resources_100p.pak" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\qtwebengine_resources_200p.pak" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebEngine.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebEngineCore.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebEngineWidgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\QtWebEngineProcess.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
) ELSE (
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebKit.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5WebKitWidgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
)
)
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\platforms"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%QTDIR%\plugins\platforms\qwindows.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\platforms" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO [Paths] > "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\qt.conf"
ECHO Plugins=plugins >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\qt.conf"
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\libpq.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\ssleay32.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\libeay32.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\libintl-*.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\libiconv-*.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\zlib1.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_dump.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_dumpall.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_restore.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%PGDIR%\bin\psql.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\installer"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy "%VCREDIST%" "%PGBUILDPATH%\installer" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Runtime built successfully.
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:CREATE_PYTHON_ENV
copy %PYTHON_DLL% "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
REM Copy Python interpretor as it's needed to run background processes
copy %PYTHON_HOME%\python.exe "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
copy %PYTHON_HOME%\pythonw.exe "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%PYTHON_HOME%\DLLs" "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\DLLs" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%PYTHON_HOME%\Lib" "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Lib" > nul
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO Cleaning up unnecessary files...
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%" %%f in (*.pyc *.pyo) do DEL /q "%%f"
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Lib" %%f in (test tests) do RD /Q /S "%%f"
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\tcl"
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:CREATE_INSTALLER
ECHO Preparing for creation of windows installer...
IF NOT EXIST "%TARGETINSTALLER%" MKDIR "%TARGETINSTALLER%"
copy "%WD%\pkg\win32\Resources\pgAdmin4.ico" "%PGBUILDPATH%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
CD "%WD%"
CD pkg
CD win32
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage1" "-s" MYAPP_NAME -r """%APP_NAME%"""
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage1" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage2" "-s" MYAPP_FULLVERSION -r """%PGADMIN4_APP_VERSION%"""
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage2" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage3" "-s" MYAPP_VERSION -r """%PGADMIN4_VERSION%"""
set ARCMODE=
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="amd64" (
set ARCMODE="x64"
)
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage3" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage4" "-s" MYAPP_ARCHITECTURESMODE -r """%ARCMODE%"""
"%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage4" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss" "-s" MYAPP_VCDIST -r """%VCREDISTNAME%"""
DEL /s "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage*" > nul
ECHO Creating windows installer... using INNO tool
CALL "%INNOTOOL%\ISCC.exe" /q "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
MOVE "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output\Setup.exe" "%TARGETINSTALLER%\%INSTALLERNAME%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
ECHO "Location - %TARGETINSTALLER%\%INSTALLERNAME%"
ECHO Installer generated successfully.
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:SIGN_INSTALLER
ECHO Attempting to sign the installer...
signtool sign /t http://timestamp.verisign.com/scripts/timstamp.dll "%TARGETINSTALLER%\%INSTALLERNAME%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 (
ECHO
ECHO ************************************************************
ECHO * Failed to sign the installer
ECHO ************************************************************
SLEEP 5
)
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:CLEANUP_ENV
ECHO Cleaning up private environment...
rd "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Include" /S /Q
DEL /s "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\pip-selfcheck.json"
ECHO Cleaned up private environment successfully.
CD %WD%
GOTO:eof
:err_handle_inno
ECHO %INNOTOOL% does not exist
ECHO Please Install Innotool and SET INNOTOOL enviroment Variable.
ECHO SET "INNOTOOL=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_visualstudio
ECHO %VCDIR% does not exist, or
ECHO %VCVAR% does not exist, or
ECHO %VCNMAKE% does not exist.
ECHO Please Install Microsoft Visual studio and SET the VCDIR enviroment Variable.
ECHO SET "VCDIR%=<PATH>"
ECHO SET "VCVAR%=<PATH>"
ECHO SET "VCNMAKE%=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_visualstudio_dist
ECHO %VCREDIST% does not exist
ECHO Please Install Microsoft Visual studio and SET the VCDIST enviroment Variable.
ECHO SET "VCDIST%=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_python
ECHO %PYTHON_HOME% does not exist, or
ECHO PYTHON_VERSION is not SET, or
ECHO %PYTHON_DLL% does not exist.
ECHO Please install Python and SET the PYTHON_HOME enviroment Variable.
ECHO SET "PYTHON_VERSION=<VERSION NUMBER>"
ECHO SET "PYTHON_HOME=<PATH>"
ECHO SET "PYTHON_DLL=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_qt
ECHO %QTDIR% does not exist.
ECHO Please Install QT SDK and SET the QTDIR enviroment variable.
ECHO SET "QTDIR=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_qt_mismatch
ECHO %QTDIR%\..\%QT_MSVC_PATH%" does not match with your current Visual Studio, version %QT_MSVC_PATH%
ECHO Your current QT installation willraise a linking error with an MSVC version mismatch.
ECHO Please use a valid QT installation with a folder %QT_MSVC_PATH%. You can use the Qt Maintenance
ECHO Tool to add or remove compiler kits.
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_qt_compactissue
ECHO %QTDIR%" does support the current architecture selected %ARCHITECTURE%
ECHO Please use a valid QT installation with a folder %QT_MSVC_PATH%. You can use the Qt Maintenance
ECHO Tool to add or remove compiler kits.
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_pg
ECHO %PGDIR% does not exist.
ECHO Please Install Postgres and SET enviroment Variable
ECHO SET "PGDIR=<PATH>"
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:err_handle_pythonvirtualenv
ECHO Python virtualenv is missing @ location - %PYTHON_HOME%\Scripts\virtualenv.exe
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:ERR_HANDLER
ECHO.
ECHO Aborting build!
CD %WD%
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:USAGE
ECHO Invalid command line options....
ECHO Usage: "Make.bat <x86 | amd64 | clean>"
ECHO.
exit /B 1
GOTO EXIT
:EXIT
@ECHO off
SETLOCAL
SET WD=%CD%
SET "PGBUILDPATH=%WD%\win-build"
SET CMDOPTION=""
IF "%1" == "clean" SET CMDOPTION="VALID"
IF "%1" == "x86" SET CMDOPTION="VALID"
IF NOT %CMDOPTION%=="VALID" (
GOTO USAGE
)
SET ARCHITECTURE=%1
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="clean" (
CALL :CLEAN
EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
)
REM Main build sequence
CALL :SET_ENVIRONMENT
CALL :VALIDATE_ENVIRONMENT || EXIT /B 1
CALL :CLEAN || EXIT /B 1
CALL :CREATE_VIRTUAL_ENV || EXIT /B 1
CALL :CREATE_RUNTIME_ENV || EXIT /B 1
CALL :CREATE_PYTHON_ENV || EXIT /B 1
CALL :CLEANUP_ENV || EXIT /B 1
CALL :CREATE_INSTALLER || EXIT /B 1
CALL :SIGN_INSTALLER || EXIT /B 1
EXIT /B %ERRORLEVEL%
REM Main build sequence Ends
:CLEAN
ECHO Removing build directory...
IF EXIST "%PGBUILDPATH%" RD "%PGBUILDPATH%" /S /Q > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Removing temp build directory...
IF EXIST "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output" rd "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output" /S /Q > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Removing installer configuration script...
IF EXIST DEL /q "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss" > nul || EXIT /B 1
EXIT /B 0
:SET_ENVIRONMENT
ECHO Configuring the environment...
IF "%PYTHON_HOME%" == "" SET "PYTHON_HOME=C:\Python27"
IF "%PYTHON_DLL%" == "" SET "PYTHON_DLL=C:\Windows\SysWOW64\python27.dll"
IF "%QTDIR%" == "" SET "QTDIR=C:\Qt\5.9.1\mingw53_32"
IF "%MAKE%" == "" SET "MAKE=mingw32-make.exe"
IF "%PGDIR%" == "" SET "PGDIR=C:\Program Files (x86)\PostgreSQL\10"
IF "%INNOTOOL%" == "" SET "INNOTOOL=C:\Program Files (x86)\Inno Setup 5"
IF "%VCREDIST%" == "" SET "VCREDIST=C:\Program Files (x86)\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC\redist\1033\vcredist_x86.exe"
IF "%SIGNTOOL%" == "" SET "SIGNTOOL=C:\Program Files\Microsoft SDKs\Windows\v7.1A\Bin\signtool.exe"
REM Set VCREDISTNAME (the filename)
for /f "delims=" %%i in ("%VCREDIST%") do set "VCREDISTNAME=%%~nxi"
REM Set additional variables we need
SET "QMAKE=%QTDIR%\bin\qmake.exe"
FOR /F "tokens=4,5 delims=. " %%a IN ('%QMAKE% -v ^| findstr /B /C:"Using Qt version "') DO SET QT_VERSION=%%a.%%b
SET "VIRTUALENV=venv"
SET "TARGET_DIR=%WD%\dist"
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_RELEASE =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_MAJOR=%%a
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_REVISION =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_MINOR=%%a
FOR /F "tokens=3" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_SUFFIX =" %WD%\web\config.py') DO SET APP_VERSION_SUFFIX=%%a
REM remove single quote from the string
SET APP_VERSION_SUFFIX=%APP_VERSION_SUFFIX:'=%
SET APP_NAME=""
FOR /F "tokens=2* DELims='" %%a IN ('findstr /C:"APP_NAME =" web\config.py') DO SET APP_NAME=%%a
FOR /f "tokens=1 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "print('%APP_NAME%'.lower().replace(' ', ''))"') DO SET APP_SHORTNAME=%%G
SET APP_VERSION=%APP_MAJOR%.%APP_MINOR%
SET INSTALLERNAME=%APP_SHORTNAME%-%APP_MAJOR%.%APP_MINOR%-%APP_VERSION_SUFFIX%-%ARCHITECTURE%.exe
IF "%APP_VERSION_SUFFIX%" == "" SET INSTALLERNAME=%APP_SHORTNAME%-%APP_MAJOR%.%APP_MINOR%-%ARCHITECTURE%.exe
REM get Python version for the runtime build ex. 2.7.1 will be 27
FOR /f "tokens=1 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "import sys; print(sys.version.split(' ')[0])"') DO SET PYTHON_MAJOR=%%G
FOR /f "tokens=2 DELims=." %%G IN ('%PYTHON_HOME%/python.exe -c "import sys; print(sys.version.split(' ')[0])"') DO SET PYTHON_MINOR=%%G
SET "PYTHON_VERSION=%PYTHON_MAJOR%%PYTHON_MINOR%"
EXIT /B 0
:VALIDATE_ENVIRONMENT
ECHO ****************************************************************
ECHO S U M M A R Y
ECHO ****************************************************************
ECHO Build path: %PGBUILDPATH%
ECHO Output directory: %TARGET_DIR%
ECHO Installer name: %INSTALLERNAME%
ECHO.
ECHO Python home: %PYTHON_HOME%
ECHO Python DLL: %PYTHON_DLL%
ECHO Python version: %PYTHON_VERSION%
ECHO Python major version: %PYTHON_MAJOR%
ECHO Python minor version: %PYTHON_MINOR%
ECHO.
ECHO Qt home: %QTDIR%
ECHO qmake executable: %QMAKE%
ECHO Qt version: %QT_VERSION%
ECHO.
ECHO PostgreSQL home: %PGDIR%
ECHO.
ECHO VC++ redistributable: %VCREDIST%
ECHO VC++ redistributable file: %VCREDISTNAME%
ECHO.
ECHO innotool executable: %INNOTOOL%
ECHO signtool executable: %SIGNTOOL%
ECHO.
ECHO App major version: %APP_MAJOR%
ECHO App minor version: %APP_MINOR%
ECHO App version: %APP_VERSION%
ECHO App version suffix: %APP_VERSION_SUFFIX%
ECHO App short name: %APP_SHORTNAME%
ECHO App name: %APP_NAME%
ECHO ****************************************************************
ECHO Checking the environment...
IF NOT EXIST "%INNOTOOL%" (
ECHO !INNOTOOL! does not exist
ECHO Please install Innotool and set the INNOTOOL environment variable.
EXIT /B 1
)
IF NOT EXIST "%VCREDIST%" (
ECHO !VCREDIST! does not exist
ECHO Please install Microsoft Visual studio and set the VCREDIST environment variable.
EXIT /B 1
)
IF NOT EXIST "%QTDIR%" (
ECHO !QTDIR! does not exist.
ECHO Please install Qt and set the QTDIR environment variable.
EXIT /B 1
)
IF NOT EXIST "%QMAKE%" (
ECHO !QMAKE! does not exist.
ECHO Please install Qt and set the QTDIR environment variable.
EXIT /B 1
)
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_HOME%" (
ECHO !PYTHON_HOME! does not exist.
ECHO Please install Python and set the PYTHON_HOME environment variable.
EXIT /B 1
)
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_DLL%" (
ECHO !PYTHON_DLL! does not exist.
ECHO Please install Python and set the PYTHON_DLL environment variable.
EXIT /B 1
)
IF NOT EXIST "%PGDIR%" (
ECHO !PGDIR! does not exist.
ECHO Please install PostgreSQL and set the PGDIR environment variable.
EXIT /B 1
)
IF NOT EXIST "%PYTHON_HOME%\Scripts\virtualenv.exe" (
ECHO !PYTHON_HOME!\Scripts\virtualenv.exe does not exist.
ECHO Please install the virtualenv package in Python.
EXIT /B 1
)
SET "PATH=%PGDIR%\bin;%PATH%"
EXIT /B 0
:CREATE_VIRTUAL_ENV
ECHO Creating virtual environment...
IF NOT EXIST "%PGBUILDPATH%" MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%"
CD "%PGBUILDPATH%"
"%PYTHON_HOME%\Scripts\virtualenv.exe" "%VIRTUALENV%"
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%PYTHON_HOME%\DLLs" "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\DLLs" > nul || EXIT /B 1
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%PYTHON_HOME%\Lib" "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Lib" > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Activating virtual environment - %PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%...
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\activate" || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Installing dependencies...
CALL pip install -r "%WD%\requirements.txt" || EXIT /B 1
CALL pip install sphinx || EXIT /B 1
REM If we're using VC++, and this is Python 3.6+, we need to remove the hack
REM above or it will break qmake. Sigh.
IF "%MAKE%" == "nmake" (
IF %PYTHON_VERSION% GEQ 36 SET CL=
)
CD %WD%
EXIT /B 0
:CREATE_RUNTIME_ENV
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime"
CD "%WD%\web"
ECHO Installing javascript dependencies...
CALL yarn install || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Bundling javascript...
CALL yarn run bundle || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Removing webpack caches...
RD /Q /S "%WD%\web\pgadmin\static\js\generated\.cache" 1> nul 2>&1
ECHO Copying web directory...
XCOPY /S /I /E /H /Y "%WD%\web" "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Cleaning up unnecessary .pyc and .pyo files...
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" %%f in (*.pyc *.pyo) do DEL /q "%%f" 1> nul 2>&1
ECHO Removing tests, Python caches and node modules...
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\web" %%f in (tests feature_tests __pycache__ node_modules) do RD /Q /S "%%f" 1> nul 2>&1
ECHO Removing the test framework...
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\regression" 1> nul 2>&1
ECHO Removing tools...
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\tools" 1> nul 2>&1
ECHO Removing any existing configurations...
DEL /q "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\pgadmin4.db" 1> nul 2>&1
DEL /q "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_local.py" 1> nul 2>&1
ECHO Creating config_distro.py
ECHO SERVER_MODE = False > "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO HELP_PATH = '../../../docs/en_US/html/' >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO DEFAULT_BINARY_PATHS = { >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO 'pg': '$DIR/../runtime', >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO 'ppas': '' >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO } >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\web\config_distro.py"
ECHO Building docs...
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\docs\en_US\html"
CD "%WD%\docs\en_US"
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\python.exe" build_code_snippet.py || EXIT /B 1
CALL "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Scripts\sphinx-build.exe" "%WD%\docs\en_US" "%PGBUILDPATH%\docs\en_US\html" || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Removing Sphinx
CALL pip uninstall -y sphinx Pygments alabaster colorama docutils imagesize requests snowballstemmer
ECHO Assembling runtime environment...
CD "%WD%\runtime"
ECHO Running qmake...
CALL "%QMAKE%" || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Cleaning the build directory...
CALL %MAKE% clean || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Running make...
CALL %MAKE% || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Staging pgAdmin4.exe...
COPY "%WD%\runtime\release\pgAdmin4.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Staging Qt components...
COPY "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Core.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Gui.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Widgets.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%QTDIR%\bin\Qt5Network.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
IF EXIST "%QTDIR%\bin\libgcc_s_dw2-1.dll" COPY "%QTDIR%\bin\libgcc_s_dw2-1.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
IF EXIST "%QTDIR%\bin\libstdc++-6.dll" COPY "%QTDIR%\bin\libstdc++-6.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
IF EXIST "%QTDIR%\bin\libwinpthread-1.dll" COPY "%QTDIR%\bin\libwinpthread-1.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\platforms" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%QTDIR%\plugins\platforms\qwindows.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\platforms" > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO [Paths] > "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\qt.conf"
ECHO Plugins=plugins >> "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime\qt.conf"
ECHO Staging PostgreSQL components...
COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\libpq.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\ssleay32.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\libeay32.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
IF EXIST "%PGDIR%\bin\libintl-*.dll" COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\libintl-*.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
IF EXIST "%PGDIR%\bin\libiconv-*.dll" COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\libiconv-*.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
IF EXIST "%PGDIR%\bin\zlib.dll" COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\zlib.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
IF EXIST "%PGDIR%\bin\zlib1.dll" COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\zlib1.dll" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_dump.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_dumpall.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1L%
COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\pg_restore.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%PGDIR%\bin\psql.exe" "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Staging VC++ runtime...
MKDIR "%PGBUILDPATH%\installer" || EXIT /B 1
COPY "%VCREDIST%" "%PGBUILDPATH%\installer" > nul || EXIT /B 1
CD %WD%
EXIT /B 0
:CREATE_PYTHON_ENV
ECHO Staging Python...
COPY %PYTHON_DLL% "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY %PYTHON_HOME%\python.exe "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
COPY %PYTHON_HOME%\pythonw.exe "%PGBUILDPATH%\runtime" > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Cleaning up unnecessary .pyc and .pyo files...
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%" %%f in (*.pyc *.pyo) do DEL /q "%%f" 1> nul 2>&1
ECHO Removing tests...
FOR /R "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Lib" %%f in (test tests) do RD /Q /S "%%f" 1> nul 2>&1
ECHO Removing TCL...
RD /Q /S "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\tcl" 1> nul 2>&1
EXIT /B 0
:CREATE_INSTALLER
ECHO Preparing for creation of windows installer...
IF NOT EXIST "%TARGET_DIR%" MKDIR "%TARGET_DIR%"
ECHO Copying icon file...
COPY "%WD%\pkg\win32\Resources\pgAdmin4.ico" "%PGBUILDPATH%" > nul || EXIT /B 1
CD "%WD%\pkg\win32"
ECHO Processing installer configuration script...
CALL "%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage1" "-s" MYAPP_NAME -r """%APP_NAME%"""
CALL "%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage1" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage2" "-s" MYAPP_FULLVERSION -r """%APP_VERSION%"""
CALL "%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage2" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage3" "-s" MYAPP_VERSION -r """v%APP_MAJOR%"""
SET ARCMODE=
IF "%ARCHITECTURE%"=="amd64" (
set ARCMODE="x64"
)
CALL "%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage3" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage4" "-s" MYAPP_ARCHITECTURESMODE -r """%ARCMODE%"""
CALL "%PYTHON_HOME%\python" "%WD%\pkg\win32\replace.py" "-i" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage4" "-o" "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss" "-s" MYAPP_VCDIST -r """%VCREDISTNAME%"""
ECHO Cleaning up...
DEL /s "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss.in_stage*" > nul
ECHO Creating windows installer using INNO tool...
CALL "%INNOTOOL%\ISCC.exe" /q "%WD%\pkg\win32\installer.iss" || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Renaming installer...
MOVE "%WD%\pkg\win32\Output\Setup.exe" "%TARGET_DIR%\%INSTALLERNAME%" > nul || EXIT /B 1
ECHO Location - %TARGET_DIR%\%INSTALLERNAME%
ECHO Installer generated successfully.
CD %WD%
EXIT /B 0
:SIGN_INSTALLER
ECHO Attempting to sign the installer...
CALL "%SIGNTOOL%" sign /t http://timestamp.verisign.com/scripts/timstamp.dll "%TARGET_DIR%\%INSTALLERNAME%"
IF %ERRORLEVEL% NEQ 0 (
ECHO.
ECHO ************************************************************
ECHO * Failed to sign the installer
ECHO ************************************************************
PAUSE
)
EXIT /B 0
:CLEANUP_ENV
ECHO Cleaning the build environment...
RD "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\Include" /S /Q 1> nul 2>&1
DEL /s "%PGBUILDPATH%\%VIRTUALENV%\pip-selfcheck.json" 1> nul 2>&1
EXIT /B 0
:USAGE
ECHO Invalid command line options.
ECHO Usage: "Make.bat <x86 | clean>"
ECHO.
EXIT /B 1
+31 -10
View File
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
#
# pgAdmin 4 - PostgreSQL Tools
#
# Copyright (C) 2013 - 2017, The pgAdmin Development Team
# Copyright (C) 2013 - 2018, The pgAdmin Development Team
# This software is released under the PostgreSQL Licence
#
#########################################################################
@@ -14,14 +14,11 @@ SHELL = /bin/sh
#########################################################################
# Include only platform-independent builds in all
all: docs pip src
all: docs pip src runtime
appbundle: docs
./pkg/mac/build.sh
appbundle-webkit: docs
PGADMIN4_USE_WEBKIT=1 ./pkg/mac/build.sh
install-node:
cd web && yarn install
@@ -35,19 +32,35 @@ linter:
cd web && yarn run linter
check: install-node bundle linter
cd web && yarn run karma start -- --single-run && python regression/runtests.py
cd web && pycodestyle --config=.pycodestyle . && yarn run karma start --single-run && python regression/runtests.py
check-python: install-node bundle
check-pep8:
cd web && pycodestyle --config=.pycodestyle .
check-python:
cd web && python regression/runtests.py --exclude feature_tests
check-feature: install-node bundle
cd web && python regression/runtests.py --pkg feature_tests
check-js: install-node linter
cd web && yarn run karma start -- --single-run
cd web && yarn run karma start --single-run
runtime-debug:
cd runtime && qmake CONFIG+=debug && make
runtime:
cd runtime && qmake CONFIG+=release && make
# Include all clean sub-targets in clean
clean: clean-appbundle clean-docker clean-dist clean-docs clean-pip clean-src
clean: clean-appbundle clean-docker clean-dist clean-docs clean-node clean-pip clean-src clean-runtime
rm -rf web/pgadmin/static/js/generated/*
rm -rf web/pgadmin/static/js/generated/.cache
rm -rf web/pgadmin/static/css/generated/*
rm -rf web/pgadmin/static/css/generated/.cache
clean-runtime:
cd runtime && make clean
clean-appbundle:
rm -rf mac-build/
@@ -61,6 +74,9 @@ clean-dist:
clean-docs:
LC_ALL=en_US.UTF-8 LANG=en_US.UTF-8 $(MAKE) -C docs/en_US -f Makefile.sphinx clean
clean-node:
rm -rf web/node-modules/
clean-pip:
rm -rf pip-build/
@@ -73,8 +89,13 @@ docker:
docs:
LC_ALL=en_US.UTF-8 LANG=en_US.UTF-8 $(MAKE) -C docs/en_US -f Makefile.sphinx html
docs-pdf:
LC_ALL=en_US.UTF-8 LANG=en_US.UTF-8 $(MAKE) -C docs/en_US -f Makefile.sphinx latexpdf
messages: msg-extract msg-update msg-compile
msg-compile:
cd web && pybabel compile -d pgadmin/translations
cd web && pybabel compile --statistics -d pgadmin/translations
msg-extract:
cd web && pybabel extract -F babel.cfg -o pgadmin/messages.pot pgadmin
+34 -11
View File
@@ -18,18 +18,16 @@ utilised.
Although developed using web technologies, pgAdmin 4 can be deployed either on
a web server using a browser, or standalone on a workstation. The runtime/
subdirectory contains a QT based runtime application intended to allow this -
it is essentially a browser and Python interpreter in one package which is
capable of hosting the Python application and presenting it to the user as a
desktop application.
it is essentially a Python application server that runs in the system tray
and allows the user to connect to the application using their web browser.
Building the Runtime
--------------------
To build the runtime, the following packages must be installed:
- QT 4.6 or above, up to 5.5 (older versions may work, but haven't been tested,
newer versions are not yet supported as Qt Webkit has been deprecated).
- Python 2.6, 2.7 or 3.3+
- QT 4.6 or above
- Python 2.7 or 3.4+
Assuming both qmake and python-config are in the path:
@@ -82,6 +80,7 @@ Create a migration file with the following command:
This will create a file in: $PGADMIN4_SRC/web/migrations/versions/ .
Add any changes to the 'upgrade' function.
Increment the SCHEMA_VERSION in $PGADMIN4_SRC/web/pgadmin/model/__init__.py file.
There is no need to increment the SETTINGS_SCHEMA_VERSION.
@@ -89,7 +88,7 @@ Configuring the Python Environment
----------------------------------
In order to run the Python code, a suitable runtime environment is required.
Python versions - Python 2.6, 2.7 or 3.3+ are currently supported. It is
Python versions - Python 2.7 or 3.4+ are currently supported. It is
recommended that a Python Virtual Environment is setup for this purpose,
rather than using the system Python environment. On Linux and Mac systems, the
process is fairly simple - adapt as required for your distribution:
@@ -196,6 +195,30 @@ http://www.tylerbutler.com/2012/05/how-to-install-python-pip-and-virtualenv-on-w
Once a virtual environment has been created and enabled, setup can continue
from step 4 above.
Building the Web Assets
-----------------------
pgAdmin is dependent on a number of third party Javascript libraries. These,
along with it's own Javascript code, SCSS/CSS code and images must be
compiled into a "bundle" which is transferred to the browser for execution
and rendering. This is far more efficient than simply requesting each
asset as it's needed by the client.
To create the bundle, you will need the 'yarn' package management tool to be
installed. Then, you can run the following commands on a *nix system to
download the required packages and build the bundle:
(pgadmin4) $ cd $PGADMIN4_SRC
(pgadmin4) $ make install-node
(pgadmin4) $ make bundle
On Windows systems (where "make" is not available, the following commands
can be used:
C:\> cd $PGADMIN4_SRC\web
C:\$PGADMIN4_SRC\web> yarn install
C:\$PGADMIN4_SRC\web> yarn run bundle
Configuring the Runtime
-----------------------
@@ -206,8 +229,8 @@ a number of known locations for the pgAdmin4.py file needed to run pgAdmin
an alternate path if needed.
If either a working environment or pgAdmin4.py cannot be found at startup, the
runtime will prompt for the locations. Alternatively, you can use Alt+Shift+P
to open the path configuration dialogue.
runtime will prompt for the locations. Alternatively, you can click the try
icon and select the Configuration option to open the configuration dialogue.
On a Linux/Mac system, the Python Path will typically consist of a single path
to the virtual environment's site-packages directory, e.g.
@@ -284,11 +307,11 @@ Qt 5.5.1, Python 2.7 and Visual Studio 2013. The examples below are for a
similar 32 bit system:
INNOTOOL=C:\Program Files\Inno Setup 5
PGDIR=C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.6
PGDIR=C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\10
PYTHON_DLL=C:\Windows\System32\Python27.dll
PYTHON_HOME=C:\Python27
PYTHON_VERSION=27
QTDIR=C:\Qt\5.5\msvc2013
QTDIR=C:\Qt\5.9\msvc2013
VCDIR=C:\Program Files\Microsoft Visual Studio 12.0\VC
To build the installer:
+4 -4
View File
@@ -3,15 +3,15 @@
echo "EXECUTING: Build docs"
echo
cd $WORKSPACE
cd ${WORKSPACE}
. $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate
. ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate
SPHINX_VER=""
if [ "$PYTHON_VERSION" = "2.6" -o "$PYTHON_VERSION" = "3.3" ]; then
if [ "${PYTHON_VERSION}" = "2.6" -o "${PYTHON_VERSION}" = "3.3" ]; then
SPHINX_VER="==1.4.9"
fi
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install Sphinx$SPHINX_VER || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install Sphinx to build the docs.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install Sphinx${SPHINX_VER} || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install Sphinx to build the docs.' ; exit 1; }
make docs || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the documentation.' ; exit 1; }
+4 -4
View File
@@ -3,15 +3,15 @@
echo "EXECUTING: Build PIP wheel"
echo
cd $WORKSPACE
cd ${WORKSPACE}
. $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate
. ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate
SPHINX_VER=""
if [ "$PYTHON_VERSION" = "2.6" -o "$PYTHON_VERSION" = "3.3" ]; then
if [ "${PYTHON_VERSION}" = "2.6" -o "${PYTHON_VERSION}" = "3.3" ]; then
SPHINX_VER="==1.4.9"
fi
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install Sphinx$SPHINX_VER || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install Sphinx to build the PIP wheel.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install Sphinx${SPHINX_VER} || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install Sphinx to build the PIP wheel.' ; exit 1; }
make pip || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the PIP wheel.' ; exit 1; }
+8 -2
View File
@@ -3,8 +3,14 @@
echo "EXECUTING: Build runtime - QT4"
echo
cd $WORKSPACE/runtime
if [ ${PYTHON_VERSION:0:1} == "3" ]; then
CONFIG=/usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin/python3-config
else
CONFIG=/usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin/python-config
fi
cd ${WORKSPACE}/runtime
make clean
PATH=/usr/local/python-$PYTHON_VERSION/bin:$PATH /bin/qmake-qt4 || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to run the QT4 qmake step.' ; exit 1; }
PATH=/usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin:$PATH PYTHON_CONFIG=${CONFIG} /bin/qmake-qt4 || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to run the QT4 qmake step.' ; exit 1; }
make all || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the QT4 runtime.' ; exit 1; }
+8 -2
View File
@@ -3,8 +3,14 @@
echo "EXECUTING: Build runtime - QT5"
echo
cd $WORKSPACE/runtime
if [ ${PYTHON_VERSION:0:1} == "3" ]; then
CONFIG=/usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin/python3-config
else
CONFIG=/usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin/python-config
fi
cd ${WORKSPACE}/runtime
make clean
PATH=/usr/local/python-$PYTHON_VERSION/bin:$PATH /bin/qmake-qt5 DEFINES+=PGADMIN4_USE_WEBKIT || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to run the QT5 qmake step.' ; exit 1; }
PATH=/usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin:$PATH PYTHON_CONFIG=${CONFIG} /bin/qmake-qt5 DEFINES+=PGADMIN4_USE_WEBKIT || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to run the QT5 qmake step.' ; exit 1; }
make all || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the QT4 runtime.' ; exit 1; }
+5 -5
View File
@@ -3,15 +3,15 @@
echo "EXECUTING: Build Tarballs"
echo
cd $WORKSPACE
cd ${WORKSPACE}
. $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate
. ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate
SPHINX_VER=""
if [ "$PYTHON_VERSION" = "2.6" -o "$PYTHON_VERSION" = "3.3" ]; then
if [ "${PYTHON_VERSION}" = "2.6" -o "${PYTHON_VERSION}" = "3.3" ]; then
SPHINX_VER="==1.4.9"
fi
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install Sphinx$SPHINX_VER || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install Sphinx to build the tarballs.' ; exit 1; }
cd $WORKSPACE/
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install Sphinx${SPHINX_VER} || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install Sphinx to build the tarballs.' ; exit 1; }
cd ${WORKSPACE}/
make src || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the tarballs.' ; exit 1; }
+9 -9
View File
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
#!/bin/sh
$WORKSPACE/ci/create_config.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the configuration.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/ci/run_python_tests.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Python tests.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/ci/run_jasmine_tests.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Jasmine tests.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/ci/build_docs.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the documentation.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/ci/build_runtime_qt4.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the QT4 runtime.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/ci/build_runtime_qt5.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the QT5 runtime.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/ci/update_messages.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to update translation message catalogs.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/ci/build_pip_wheel.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the PIP wheel.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/ci/build_tarballs.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the tarballs.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/create_config.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the configuration.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/run_python_tests.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Python tests.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/run_jasmine_tests.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Jasmine tests.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/build_docs.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the documentation.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/build_runtime_qt4.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the QT4 runtime.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/build_runtime_qt5.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the QT5 runtime.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/update_messages.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to update translation message catalogs.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/build_pip_wheel.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the PIP wheel.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/ci/build_tarballs.sh || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to build the tarballs.' ; exit 1; }
+8 -8
View File
@@ -3,13 +3,13 @@
echo "EXECUTING: Create pgAdmin config"
echo
cd $WORKSPACE
cd ${WORKSPACE}
cp $JENKINS_HOME/pgadmin-configs/config_local.py $WORKSPACE/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo LOG_FILE = \"$WORKSPACE/var/pgadmin4.log\" >> $WORKSPACE/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo SESSION_DB_PATH = \"$WORKSPACE/var/sessions\" >> $WORKSPACE/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo STORAGE_DIR = \"$WORKSPACE/var/storage\" >> $WORKSPACE/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo SQLITE_PATH = \"$WORKSPACE/var/pgadmin4.db\" >> $WORKSPACE/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo TEST_SQLITE_PATH = \"$WORKSPACE/var/pgadmin4.db\" >> $WORKSPACE/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
cp ${JENKINS_HOME}/pgadmin-configs/config_local.py ${WORKSPACE}/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo LOG_FILE = \"${WORKSPACE}/var/pgadmin4.log\" >> ${WORKSPACE}/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo SESSION_DB_PATH = \"${WORKSPACE}/var/sessions\" >> ${WORKSPACE}/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo STORAGE_DIR = \"${WORKSPACE}/var/storage\" >> ${WORKSPACE}/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo SQLITE_PATH = \"${WORKSPACE}/var/pgadmin4.db\" >> ${WORKSPACE}/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
echo TEST_SQLITE_PATH = \"${WORKSPACE}/var/pgadmin4.db\" >> ${WORKSPACE}/web/config_local.py || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create config_local.py.' ; exit 1; }
cp $JENKINS_HOME/pgadmin-configs/test_config.json $WORKSPACE/web/regression/test_config.json || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to copy the test configuration.' ; exit 1; }
cp ${JENKINS_HOME}/pgadmin-configs/test_config.json ${WORKSPACE}/web/regression/test_config.json || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to copy the test configuration.' ; exit 1; }
+12 -12
View File
@@ -13,25 +13,25 @@ export DISPLAY=:99
echo "Creating Python ${PYTHON_VERSION} virtual environment..."
echo
cd $WORKSPACE/
cd ${WORKSPACE}/
PYTHON_SUFFIX=""
if [[ "$PYTHON_VERSION" == 3* ]]; then
if [[ "${PYTHON_VERSION}" == 3* ]]; then
PYTHON_SUFFIX="3"
fi
if [ "$PYTHON_VERSION" == 2.6 -o "$PYTHON_VERSION" == 3.3 ]; then
/usr/bin/virtualenv --no-wheel -p /usr/local/python-$PYTHON_VERSION/bin/python$PYTHON_SUFFIX $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install wheel==0.29.0 || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install wheel 0.29.0.' ; exit 1; }
if [ "${PYTHON_VERSION}" == 2.6 -o "${PYTHON_VERSION}" == 3.3 ]; then
/usr/bin/virtualenv --no-wheel -p /usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin/python${PYTHON_SUFFIX} ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install wheel==0.29.0 || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install wheel 0.29.0.' ; exit 1; }
else
/usr/bin/virtualenv -p /usr/local/python-$PYTHON_VERSION/bin/python$PYTHON_SUFFIX $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
/usr/bin/virtualenv -p /usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin/python${PYTHON_SUFFIX} ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
fi
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install -r requirements.txt || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the application requirements.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install -r web/regression/requirements.txt || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the regression test requirements.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install -r requirements.txt || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the application requirements.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install -r web/regression/requirements.txt || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the regression test requirements.' ; exit 1; }
cd web
/usr/bin/yarn install || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the required Javascript modules.' ; exit 1; }
@@ -41,9 +41,9 @@ cd ../
echo "Running regression tests..."
echo
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/python $WORKSPACE/web/regression/runtests.py --pkg feature_tests || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Feature tests.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/python ${WORKSPACE}/web/regression/runtests.py --pkg feature_tests || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Feature tests.' ; exit 1; }
echo "Cleaning up..."
echo
kill $FB_PID
kill ${FB_PID}
+1 -1
View File
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
echo "EXECUTING: Jasmine tests"
echo
cd $WORKSPACE/web/
cd ${WORKSPACE}/web/
/usr/bin/yarn install || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the required Javascript modules.' ; exit 1; }
/usr/bin/yarn run linter || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to lint the Javascript code.' ; exit 1; }
+16 -11
View File
@@ -6,28 +6,33 @@ echo
echo "Creating Python ${PYTHON_VERSION} virtual environment..."
echo
cd $WORKSPACE/
cd ${WORKSPACE}/
PYTHON_SUFFIX=""
if [[ "$PYTHON_VERSION" == 3* ]]; then
if [[ "${PYTHON_VERSION}" == 3* ]]; then
PYTHON_SUFFIX="3"
fi
if [ "$PYTHON_VERSION" == 2.6 -o "$PYTHON_VERSION" == 3.3 ]; then
/usr/bin/virtualenv --no-wheel -p /usr/local/python-$PYTHON_VERSION/bin/python$PYTHON_SUFFIX $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install wheel==0.29.0 || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install wheel 0.29.0.' ; exit 1; }
if [ "${PYTHON_VERSION}" == 2.6 -o "${PYTHON_VERSION}" == 3.3 ]; then
/usr/bin/virtualenv --no-wheel -p /usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin/python${PYTHON_SUFFIX} ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install wheel==0.29.0 || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install wheel 0.29.0.' ; exit 1; }
else
/usr/bin/virtualenv -p /usr/local/python-$PYTHON_VERSION/bin/python$PYTHON_SUFFIX $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
/usr/bin/virtualenv -p /usr/local/python-${PYTHON_VERSION}/bin/python${PYTHON_SUFFIX} ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to create the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
fi
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install -r requirements.txt || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the application requirements.' ; exit 1; }
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install -r web/regression/requirements.txt || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the regression test requirements.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install -r requirements.txt || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the application requirements.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/pip install -r web/regression/requirements.txt || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to install the regression test requirements.' ; exit 1; }
echo "Running PEP-8 checks..."
echo
make check-pep8 || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Python PEP-8 checks.' ; exit 1; }
echo "Running regression tests..."
echo
$WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/python $WORKSPACE/web/regression/runtests.py --exclude feature_tests || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Python tests.' ; exit 1; }
${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/python ${WORKSPACE}/web/regression/runtests.py --exclude feature_tests || { echo 'ERROR: Error detected when running the Python tests.' ; exit 1; }
+2 -2
View File
@@ -3,9 +3,9 @@
echo "EXECUTING: Compile messages"
echo
cd $WORKSPACE/web
cd ${WORKSPACE}/web
. $WORKSPACE/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
. ${WORKSPACE}/pgadmin-venv/bin/activate || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to activate the Python virtual environment.' ; exit 1; }
pybabel extract -F babel.cfg -o pgadmin/messages.pot pgadmin || { echo 'ERROR: Failed to extract messages from the source code.' ; exit 1; }
+4 -3
View File
@@ -1,12 +1,13 @@
.. _add_restore_point_dialog:
**********************************
The Add named restore point Dialog
**********************************
***************************************
`Add named restore point Dialog`:index:
***************************************
Use the *Add named restore point* dialog to take a named snapshot of the state of the server for use in a recovery file. To create a named restore point, the server's postgresql.conf file must specify a *wal_level* value of *archive*, *hot_standby*, or *logical*. You must be a database superuser to create a restore point.
.. image:: images/add_restore_point.png
:alt: Restore point dialog
When the *Restore point name* window launches, use the field *Enter the name of the restore point to add* to provide a descriptive name for the restore point.
+3 -3
View File
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
.. _backup_and_restore:
******************
Backup and Restore
******************
***************************
`Backup and Restore`:index:
***************************
A powerful, but user-friendly Backup and Restore tool provides an easy way to use pg_dump, pg_dumpall, and pg_restore to take backups and create copies of databases or database objects for use in a development environment.
+41 -26
View File
@@ -1,68 +1,75 @@
.. _backup_dialog:
*****************
The Backup Dialog
*****************
**********************
`Backup Dialog`:index:
**********************
Using the *pg_dump* utility, *pgAdmin* provides an easy way to create a backup in a plain-text or archived format. You can then use a client application (like *psql* or the *Query Tool*) to restore a plain-text backup file, or use the Postgres *pg_restore* utility to restore an archived backup. The *pg_dump* utility must have read access to all database objects that you want to back up.
You can backup a single table, a schema, or a complete database. Select the name of the backup source in the *pgAdmin* tree control, right click to open the context menu, and select *Backup...* to open the *Backup* dialog. The name of the object selected will appear in the dialog title bar.
.. image:: images/backup_general.png
:alt: Backup dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to specify parameters for the backup:
* Enter the name of the backup file in the *Filename* field. Optionally, select the *Browser* icon (...) to the right to navigate into a directory and select a file that will contain the archive.
* Use the drop-down listbox in the *Format* field to select the format that is best suited for your application. Each format has advantages and disadvantages:
* Use the drop-down listbox in the *Format* field to select the format that is best suited for your application. Each format has advantages and disadvantages:
* Select *Custom* to create a custom archive file that you can use with *pg_restore* to create a copy of a database. Custom archive file formats must be restored with *pg_restore*. This format offers the opportunity to select which database objects to restore from the backup file. *Custom* archive format is recommended for medium to large databases as it is compressed by default.
* Select *Tar* to generate a tar archive file that you can restore with *pg_restore*. The tar format does not support compression.
* Select *Plain* to create a plain-text script file. A plain-text script file contains SQL statements and commands that you can execute at the *psql* command line to recreate the database objects and load the table data. A plain-text backup file can be edited in a text editor, if desired, before using the *psql* program to restore database objects. *Plain* format is normally recommended for smaller databases; script dumps are not recommended for blobs. The SQL commands within the script will reconstruct the database to the last saved state of the database. A plain-text script can be used to reconstruct the database on another machine, or (with modifications) on other architectures.
* Select *Directory* to generate a directory-format archive suitable for use with *pg_restore*. This file format creates a directory with one file for each table and blob being dumped, plus a *Table of Contents* file describing the dumped objects in a machine-readable format that *pg_restore* can read. This format is compressed by default.
* Use the *Compression Ratio* field to select a compression level for the backup. Specify a value of zero to mean use no compression; specify a maximum compression value of 9. Please note that tar archives do not support compression.
* Use the *Compression Ratio* field to select a compression level for the backup. Specify a value of zero to mean use no compression; specify a maximum compression value of 9. Please note that tar archives do not support compression.
* Use the *Encoding* drop-down listbox to select the character encoding method that should be used for the archive.
* Use the *Number of Jobs* field (when applicable) to specify the number of tables that will be dumped simultaneously in a parallel backup.
* Use the dropdown listbox next to *Rolename* to specify the role that owns the backup.
* Use the dropdown listbox next to *Rolename* to specify the role that owns the backup.
Click the *Dump options* tab to continue. Use the box fields in the *Dump options* tab to provide options for *pg_dump*.
.. image:: images/backup_sections.png
:alt: Sections option on backup dialog
* Move switches in the **Sections** field box to select a portion of the object that will be backed up.
* Move switches in the **Sections** field box to select a portion of the object that will be backed up.
* Move the switch next to *Pre-data* to the *Yes* position to include all data definition items not included in the data or post-data item lists.
* Move the switch next to *Data* to the *Yes* position to backup actual table data, large-object contents, and sequence values.
* Move the switch next to *Data* to the *Yes* position to backup actual table data, large-object contents, and sequence values.
* Move the switch next to *Post-data* to the *Yes* position to include definitions of indexes, triggers, rules, and constraints other than validated check constraints.
.. image:: images/backup_objects.png
.. image:: images/backup_objects.png
:alt: Type of objects option on backup dialog
* Move switches in the **Type of objects** field box to specify details about the type of objects that will be backed up.
* Move the switch next to *Only data* to the *Yes* position to limit the back up to data.
* Move the switch next to *Only schema* to limit the back up to schema-level database objects.
* Move the switch next to *Blobs* to the *No* position to exclude large objects in the backup.
* Move the switch next to *Blobs* to the *No* position to exclude large objects in the backup.
.. image:: images/backup_do_not_save.png
:alt: Do not save option on backup dialog
* Move switches in the **Do not save** field box to select the objects that will not be included in the backup.
* Move the switch next to *Owner* to the *Yes* position to include commands that set object ownership.
* Move the switch next to *Owner* to the *Yes* position to exclude commands that set object ownership.
* Move the switch next to *Privilege* to the *Yes* position to include commands that create access privileges.
* Move the switch next to *Privilege* to the *Yes* position to exclude commands that create access privileges.
* Move the switch next to *Tablespace* to the *Yes* position to include tablespaces.
* Move the switch next to *Tablespace* to the *Yes* position to exclude tablespaces.
* Move the switch next to *Unlogged table data* to the *Yes* position to include the contents of unlogged tables.
* Move the switch next to *Unlogged table data* to the *Yes* position to exclude the contents of unlogged tables.
* Move the switch next to *Comments* to the *Yes* position to exclude commands that set the comments. **Note:** This option is visible only for database server greater than or equal to 11.
.. image:: images/backup_queries.png
:alt: Queries option on backup dialog
* Move switches in the **Queries** field box to specify the type of statements that should be included in the backup.
@@ -74,15 +81,19 @@ Click the *Dump options* tab to continue. Use the box fields in the *Dump option
* Move the switch next to *Include DROP DATABASE statement* to the *Yes* position to include a command in the backup that will drop any existing database object with the same name before recreating the object during a backup.
* Move the switch next to *Load Via Partition Root* to the *Yes* position, so when dumping a COPY or INSERT statement for a partitioned table, target the root of the partitioning hierarchy which contains it rather than the partition itself. **Note:** This option is visible only for database server greater than or equal to 11.
.. image:: images/backup_disable.png
:alt: Disable option on backup dialog
* Move switches in the **Disable** field box to specify the type of statements that should be excluded from the backup.
* Move the switch next to *Trigger* (active when creating a data-only backup) to the *Yes* position to include commands that will disable triggers on the target table while the data is being loaded.
* Move the switch next to *$ quoting* to the *Yes* position to enable dollar quoting within function bodies; if disabled, the function body will be quoted using SQL standard string syntax.
.. image:: images/backup_miscellaneous.png
:alt: Miscellaneous option on backup dialog
* Move switches in the **Miscellaneous** field box to specify miscellaneous backup options.
@@ -94,15 +105,19 @@ Click the *Dump options* tab to continue. Use the box fields in the *Dump option
* Move the switch next to *Use SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION* to the *Yes* position to include a statement that will use a SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION command to determine object ownership (instead of an ALTER OWNER command).
When you’ve specified the details that will be incorporated into the pg_dump command:
When you’ve specified the details that will be incorporated into the pg_dump command:
* Click the *Backup* button to build and execute a command that builds a backup based on your selections on the *Backup* dialog.
* Click the *Backup* button to build and execute a command that builds a backup based on your selections on the *Backup* dialog.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
.. image:: images/backup_messages.png
.. image:: images/backup_messages.png
:alt: Backup success notification popup
Use the **Stop Process** button to stop the Backup process.
If the backup is successful, a popup window will confirm success. Click *Click here for details* on the popup window to launch the *Process Watcher*. The *Process Watcher* logs all the activity associated with the backup and provides additional information for troubleshooting.
.. image:: images/backup_process_watcher.png
:alt: Backup process watcher
If the backup is unsuccessful, you can review the error messages returned by the backup command on the *Process Watcher*.
+11 -6
View File
@@ -1,29 +1,34 @@
.. _backup_globals_dialog:
*************************
The Backup Globals Dialog
*************************
******************************
`Backup Globals Dialog`:index:
******************************
Use the *Backup Globals* dialog to create a plain-text script that recreates all of the database objects within a cluster, and the global objects that are shared by those databases. Global objects include tablespaces, roles, and object properties. You can use the pgAdmin *Query Tool* to play back a plain-text script, and recreate the objects in the backup.
.. image:: images/backup_globals_general.png
:alt: Backup globals dialog
Use the fields in the *General* tab to specify the following:
* Enter the name of the backup file in the *Filename* field. Optionally, select the *Browser* icon (ellipsis) to the right to navigate into a directory and select a file that will contain the archive.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Role name* to specify a role with connection privileges on the selected server. The role will be used for authentication during the backup.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Role name* to specify a role with connection privileges on the selected server. The role will be used for authentication during the backup.
Move switches in the **Miscellaneous** field box to specify the type of statements that should be included in the backup.
* Move the *Verbose messages* switch to the *No* position to exclude status messages from the backup. The default is *Yes*.
* Move the *Force double quote on identifiers* switch to the *Yes* position to name identifiers without changing case. The default is *No*.
Click the *Backup* button to build and execute a command based on your selections; click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
.. image:: images/backup_globals_messages.png
:alt: Backup globals success notification popup
Use the **Stop Process** button to stop the Backup process.
If the backup is successful, a popup window will confirm success. Click *Click here for details* on the popup window to launch the *Process Watcher*. The *Process Watcher* logs all the activity associated with the backup and provides additional information for troubleshooting.
.. image:: images/backup_globals_process_watcher.png
:alt: Backup globals process watcher
If the backup is unsuccessful, review the error message returned by the *Process Watcher* to resolve any issue.
+68 -9
View File
@@ -1,29 +1,88 @@
.. _backup_server_dialog:
*************************
The Backup Server Dialog
*************************
*****************************
`Backup Server Dialog`:index:
*****************************
Use the *Backup Server* dialog to create a plain-text script that will recreate the selected server. You can use the pgAdmin *Query Tool* to play back a plain-text script, and recreate the server.
.. image:: images/backup_server_general.png
:alt: Backup server dialog
Use the fields in the *General* tab to specify the following:
* Enter the name of the backup file in the *Filename* field. Optionally, select the *Browser* icon (ellipsis) to the right to navigate into a directory and select a file that will contain the archive.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Role name* to specify a role with connection privileges on the selected server. The role will be used for authentication during the backup.
* Use the *Encoding* drop-down listbox to select the character encoding method that should be used for the archive. **Note:** This option is visible only for database server greater than or equal to 11.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Role name* to specify a role with connection privileges on the selected server. The role will be used for authentication during the backup.
Move switches in the *Miscellaneous* box to specify the type of statements that should be included in the backup.
* Move the *Verbose messages* switch to the *No* position to exclude status messages from the backup. The default is *Yes*.
* Move the *Force double quote on identifiers* switch to the *Yes* position to name identifiers without changing case. The default is *No*.
.. image:: images/backup_server_objects.png
:alt: Type of objects option on backup server dialog
* Move switches in the **Type of objects** field box to specify details about the type of objects that will be backed up.
* Move the switch next to *Only data* to the *Yes* position to limit the back up to data.
* Move the switch next to *Only schema* to limit the back up to schema-level database objects.
.. image:: images/backup_server_do_not_save.png
:alt: Do not save option on backup server dialog
* Move switches in the **Do not save** field box to select the objects that will not be included in the backup.
* Move the switch next to *Owner* to the *Yes* position to exclude commands that set object ownership.
* Move the switch next to *Privilege* to the *Yes* position to exclude commands that create access privileges.
* Move the switch next to *Tablespace* to the *Yes* position to exclude tablespaces.
* Move the switch next to *Unlogged table data* to the *Yes* position to exclude the contents of unlogged tables.
* Move the switch next to *Comments* to the *Yes* position to exclude commands that set the comments. **Note:** This option is visible only for database server greater than or equal to 11.
.. image:: images/backup_server_queries.png
:alt: Queries option on backup server dialog
* Move switches in the **Queries** field box to specify the type of statements that should be included in the backup.
* Move the switch next to *Use Column Inserts* to the *Yes* position to dump the data in the form of INSERT statements and include explicit column names. Please note: this may make restoration from backup slow.
* Move the switch next to *Use Insert commands* to the *Yes* position to dump the data in the form of INSERT statements rather than using a COPY command. Please note: this may make restoration from backup slow.
* Move the switch next to *Include DROP DATABASE statement* to the *Yes* position to include a command in the backup that will drop any existing database object with the same name before recreating the object during a backup.
.. image:: images/backup_server_disable.png
:alt: Disable option on backup server dialog
* Move switches in the **Disable** field box to specify the type of statements that should be excluded from the backup.
* Move the switch next to *Trigger* (active when creating a data-only backup) to the *Yes* position to include commands that will disable triggers on the target table while the data is being loaded.
* Move the switch next to *$ quoting* to the *Yes* position to enable dollar quoting within function bodies; if disabled, the function body will be quoted using SQL standard string syntax.
.. image:: images/backup_server_miscellaneous.png
:alt: Miscellaneous option on backup server dialog
* Move switches in the **Miscellaneous** field box to specify miscellaneous backup options.
* Move the switch next to *With OIDs* to the *Yes* position to include object identifiers as part of the table data for each table.
* Move the switch next to *Verbose messages* to the *No* position to instruct *pg_dump* to exclude verbose messages.
* Move the switch next to *Force double quotes on identifiers* to the *Yes* position to force the quoting of all identifiers.
* Move the switch next to *Use SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION* to the *Yes* position to include a statement that will use a SET SESSION AUTHORIZATION command to determine object ownership (instead of an ALTER OWNER command).
Click the *Backup* button to build and execute a command based on your selections; click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
.. image:: images/backup_server_messages.png
:alt: Backup server success notification popup
Use the **Stop Process** button to stop the Backup process.
If the backup is successful, a popup window will confirm success. Click *Click here for details* on the popup window to launch the *Process Watcher*. The *Process Watcher* logs all the activity associated with the backup and provides additional information for troubleshooting.
.. image:: images/backup_server_process_watcher.png
:alt: Backup server process watcher
If the backup is unsuccessful, review the error message returned by the *Process Watcher* to resolve any issue.
+6 -5
View File
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
.. _browser:
********************
The pgAdmin 4 Client
********************
*****************************
`The pgAdmin 4 Client`:index:
*****************************
pgAdmin 4 supports all PostgreSQL features, from writing simple SQL queries to developing complex databases. It is designed to query an active database (in real-time), allowing you to stay current with modifications and implementations.
pgAdmin 4 supports all PostgreSQL features, from writing simple SQL queries to developing complex databases. It is designed to query an active database (in real-time), allowing you to stay current with modifications and implementations.
Features of pgAdmin 4 include:
@@ -22,6 +22,7 @@ Features of pgAdmin 4 include:
When pgAdmin opens, the interface features a menu bar and a window divided into two panes: the *Browser* tree control in the left pane, and a tabbed browser in the right pane.
.. image:: images/pgadmin_welcome.png
:alt: pgAdmin4 welcome page
Select an icon from the *Quick Links* panel on the *Dashboard* tab to:
@@ -30,7 +31,7 @@ Select an icon from the *Quick Links* panel on the *Dashboard* tab to:
Links in the *Getting Started* panel open a new browser tab that provide useful information for Postgres users:
* Click the *PostgreSQL Documentation* link to navigate to the *Documentation* page for the PostgreSQL open-source project; once at the project site, you can review the manuals for the currently supported versions of the PostgreSQL server.
* Click the *PostgreSQL Documentation* link to navigate to the *Documentation* page for the PostgreSQL open-source project; once at the project site, you can review the manuals for the currently supported versions of the PostgreSQL server.
* Click the *pgAdmin Website* link to navigate to the pgAdmin project website. The pgAdmin site features news about recent pgAdmin releases and other project information.
* Click the *Planet PostgreSQL* link to navigate to the blog aggregator for Postgres related blogs.
* Click the *Community Support* link to navigate to the *Community* page at the PostgreSQL open-source project site; this page provides information about obtaining support for PostgreSQL features.
+9 -6
View File
@@ -1,23 +1,25 @@
.. _cast_dialog:
***************
The Cast Dialog
***************
********************
`Cast Dialog`:index:
********************
Use the *Cast* dialog to define a cast. A cast specifies how to convert a value from one data type to another.
The *Cast* dialog organizes the development of a cast through the following dialog tabs: *General* and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Cast* dialog organizes the development of a cast through the following dialog tabs: *General* and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/cast_general.png
:alt: Cast dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the cast:
* The *Name* field is disabled. The name that will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control is the *Source* type concatenated with the *Target* type, and is generated automatically when you make selections on the *Cast* dialog *Definition* tab.
* The *Name* field is disabled. The name that will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control is the *Source* type concatenated with the *Target* type, and is generated automatically when you make selections on the *Cast* dialog *Definition* tab.
* Store notes about the cast in the *Comment* field.
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/cast_definition.png
:alt: Cast dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define parameters:
@@ -35,8 +37,9 @@ Your entries in the *Cast* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below).
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Cast* dialog:
.. image:: images/cast_sql.png
:alt: Cast dialog sql tab
The cast uses a function named *int4(bigint)* to convert a biginteger data type to an integer.
The cast uses a function named *int4(bigint)* to convert a biginteger data type to an integer.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
+5 -4
View File
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
.. _change_password_dialog:
**************************
The Change Password Dialog
**************************
*******************************
`Change Password Dialog`:index:
*******************************
It is a good policy to routinely change your password to protect data, even in what you may consider a 'safe' environment. In the workplace, failure to apply an appropriate password policy could leave you in breach of Data Protection laws.
Please consider the following guidelines when selecting a password:
Please consider the following guidelines when selecting a password:
* Ensure that your password is an adequate length; 6 characters should be the absolute minimum number of characters in the password.
* Ensure that your password is not open to dictionary attacks. Use a mixture of upper and lower case letters and numerics, and avoid words or names. Consider using the first letter from each word in a phrase that you will remember easily but is an unfamiliar acronym.
@@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Please consider the following guidelines when selecting a password:
The above should be considered a starting point: It is not a comprehensive list and it **will not guarantee security**.
.. image:: images/password.png
:alt: Change database password dialog
Use the *Change Password* dialog to change your password:
+26
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
.. _change_user_password:
************************************
`Change User Password Dialog`:index:
************************************
It is a good policy to routinely change your password to protect data, even in what you may consider a 'safe' environment. In the workplace, failure to apply an appropriate password policy could leave you in breach of Data Protection laws.
Please consider the following guidelines when selecting a password:
* Ensure that your password is an adequate length; 6 characters should be the absolute minimum number of characters in the password.
* Ensure that your password is not open to dictionary attacks. Use a mixture of upper and lower case letters and numerics, and avoid words or names. Consider using the first letter from each word in a phrase that you will remember easily but is an unfamiliar acronym.
* Ensure that your password is changed regularly; at minimum, change it every ninety days.
The above should be considered a starting point: It is not a comprehensive list and it **will not guarantee security**.
.. image:: images/change_user_password.png
:alt: Change current user password dialog
Use the *Change Password* dialog to change your password:
* Enter your existing password in the *Current Password* field.
* Enter the desired password for in the *New Password* field.
* Re-enter the new password in the *Confirm Password* field.
Click the *Change Password* button to change your password; click *Close* to exit the dialog.
+13 -10
View File
@@ -1,43 +1,46 @@
.. _check_dialog:
****************
The Check Dialog
****************
*********************
`Check Dialog`:index:
*********************
Use the *Check* dialog to define or modify a check constraint. A check constraint specifies an expression that produces a Boolean result that new or updated rows must satisfy for an insert or update operation to succeed.
Use the *Check* dialog to define or modify a check constraint. A check constraint specifies an expression that produces a Boolean result that new or updated rows must satisfy for an insert or update operation to succeed.
The *Check* dialog organizes the development of a check constraint through the *General* and *Definition* tabs. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Check* dialog organizes the development of a check constraint through the *General* and *Definition* tabs. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/check_general.png
:alt: Check dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the check constraint:
* Use the *Name* field to provide a descriptive name for the check constraint that will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control. With PostgreSQL 9.5 forward, when a table has multiple check constraints, they will be tested for each row in alphabetical order by name and after NOT NULL constraints.
* Store notes about the check constraint in the *Comment* field.
* Store notes about the check constraint in the *Comment* field.
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/check_definition.png
:alt: Check dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the check constraint:
* Provide the expression that a row must satisfy in the *Check* field.
* Move the *No Inherit?* switch to the *Yes* position to specify this constraint is automatically inherited by a table's children. The default is *No*.
* Move the *No Inherit?* switch to the *Yes* position to specify this constraint is automatically inherited by a table's children. The default is *No*.
* Move the *Don't validate?* switch to the *No* position to skip validation of existing data; the constraint may not hold for all rows in the table. The default is *Yes*.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Check* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Check* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Check* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Check* dialog:
.. image:: images/check_sql.png
:alt: Check dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a check constraint named *check_price* on the *price* column of the *products* table. The constraint confirms that any values added to the column are greater than 0.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+19
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
.. _clear_saved_passwords:
******************************
`Clear Saved Passwords`:index:
******************************
Use *Clear Saved Password* functionality to clear the saved password for the database server.
.. image:: images/clear_saved_password.png
*Clear Saved Password* shows in the context menu for the selected server as well as under the *Object* menu on the top menu bar.
Use *Clear SSH Tunnel Password* functionality to clear the saved password of SSH Tunnel to connect to the database server.
.. image:: images/clear_tunnel_password.png
*Clear SSH Tunnel Password* shows in the context menu for the selected server as well as under the *Object* menu on the top menu bar.
**Note:** It will be enabled/visible when the password for the selected database server is already saved.
+3 -3
View File
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
.. _code_overview:
*************
Code Overview
*************
**********************
`Code Overview`:index:
**********************
The bulk of pgAdmin is a Python web application written using the Flask framework
on the backend, and HTML5 with CSS3, Bootstrap and jQuery on the front end. A
+7 -4
View File
@@ -1,19 +1,22 @@
.. _code_review:
*****************
Code Review Notes
*****************
**************************
`Code Review Notes`:index:
**************************
This document lists a number of standard items that will be checked during the
review process for any patches submitted for inclusion in pgAdmin.
* Ensure all code follows the pgAdmin :doc:`coding_standards`.
* Ensure all code has unit test coverage and API/feature test coverage where
appropriate.
* Copyright years must be correct and properly formatted (to make it easy to make
bulk updates every year). The start date should always be 2013, and the end year
the current year, e.g.
Copyright (C) 2013 - 2017, The pgAdmin Development Team
Copyright (C) 2013 - 2019, The pgAdmin Development Team
* Ensure there's a blank line immediately following any copyright headers.
+7 -4
View File
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
.. _coding_standards:
****************
Coding Standards
****************
*************************
`Coding Standards`:index:
*************************
pgAdmin uses multiple technologies and multiple languages, each of which have
their own coding standards.
@@ -106,6 +106,9 @@ Note the use of a descriptive function name, using the underscore character to
separate words in all lower case, and short but descriptive lower case variable
names.
.. note:: From version 3.0 onwards, new or refactored code should be written using
ES6 features and conventions.
C++
---
@@ -167,7 +170,7 @@ with the required file header is shown below::
#
# pgAdmin 4 - PostgreSQL Tools
#
# Copyright (C) 2013 - 2017, The pgAdmin Development Team
# Copyright (C) 2013 - 2019, The pgAdmin Development Team
# This software is released under the PostgreSQL Licence
#
##########################################################################
+18 -15
View File
@@ -1,50 +1,53 @@
.. _collation_dialog:
********************
The Collation Dialog
********************
*************************
`Collation Dialog`:index:
*************************
Use the *Collation* dialog to define a collation. A collation is an SQL schema object that maps a SQL name to operating system locales. To create a collation, you must have a CREATE privilege on the destination schema.
The *Collation* dialog organizes the development of a collation through the following dialog tabs: *General* and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Collation* dialog organizes the development of a collation through the following dialog tabs: *General* and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/collation_general.png
:alt: Collation dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the collation:
* Use the *Name* field to provide a name for the collation. The collation name must be unique within a schema. The name will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control.
* Select the name of the owner from the drop-down listbox in the *Owner* field.
* Select the name of the owner from the drop-down listbox in the *Owner* field.
* Select the name of the schema in which the collation will reside from the drop-down listbox in the *Schema* field.
* Store notes about the collation in the *Comment* field.
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/collation_definition.png
:alt: Collation dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to specify the operating system locale settings:
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to specify the operating system locale settings:
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Copy collation* to select the name of an existing collation to copy. The new collation will have the same properties as the existing one, but will be an independent object. If you choose to copy an existing collation, you cannot modify the collation properties displayed on this tab.
* Use the *Locale* field to specify a locale; a locale specifies language and language formatting characteristics. If you specify this, you cannot specify either of the following parameters. To view a list of locales supported by your Linux system use the command *locale -a*.
* Use the *LC_COLLATE* field to specify a locale with specified string sort order. The locale must be applicable to the current database encoding. (See CREATE DATABASE for details.)
* Use the *LC_CTYPE* field to specify a locale with specified character classification. The locale must be applicable to the current database encoding. (See CREATE DATABASE for details.)
* Use the *LC_COLLATE* field to specify a locale with specified string sort order. The locale must be applicable to the current database encoding. (See CREATE DATABASE for details.)
* Use the *LC_CTYPE* field to specify a locale with specified character classification. The locale must be applicable to the current database encoding. (See CREATE DATABASE for details.)
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Collation* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Collation* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Collation* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Collation* dialog:
.. image:: images/collation_sql.png
:alt: Collation dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a collation named *french* that uses the rules specified for the locale, *fr_FR.utf8. The collation is owned by *postgres*.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation. For more information about setting a locale, see Chapter 22.1 Locale Support of the PostgreSQL core documentation:
The example shown demonstrates creating a collation named *french* that uses the rules specified for the locale, *fr-BI-x-icu. The collation is owned by *postgres*.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation. For more information about setting a locale, see Chapter 22.1 Locale Support of the PostgreSQL core documentation:
http://www.postgresql.org/docs/9.5/static/locale.html
http://www.postgresql.org/docs/9.5/static/locale.html
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
* Click the *Reset* button to restore configuration parameters.
+20 -15
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _column_dialog:
*****************
The Column Dialog
*****************
**********************
`Column Dialog`:index:
**********************
Use the *Column* dialog to add a column to an existing table or modify a column definition.
The *Column* dialog organizes the development of a column through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Column* dialog organizes the development of a column through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/column_general.png
:alt: Column dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the column:
@@ -18,6 +19,7 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the column:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/column_definition.png
:alt: Column dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to add parameters for the column. (Fields are disabled if inapplicable.)
@@ -30,41 +32,44 @@ Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to add parameters for the column. (Fields
Click the *Variables* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/column_variables.png
:alt: Column dialog variables tab
Use the *Variables* tab to to specify the number of distinct values that may be present in the column; this value overrides estimates made by the ANALYZE command. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add a *Name*/*Value* pair:
* Select the name of the variable from the drop-down listbox in the *Name* field.
* Select *n_distinct* to specify the number of distinct values for the column.
* Select the name of the variable from the drop-down listbox in the *Name* field.
* Select *n_distinct* to specify the number of distinct values for the column.
* Select *n_distinct_inherited* to specify the number of distinct values for the table and its children.
* Specify the number of distinct values in the *Value* field. For more information, see the documentation for `ALTER TABLE <http://www.postgresql.org/docs/9.6/static/sql_altertable.html>`_.
* Specify the number of distinct values in the *Value* field. For more information, see the documentation for `ALTER TABLE <http://www.postgresql.org/docs/9.6/static/sql_altertable.html>`_.
Click the *Add* icon (+) to specify each additional *Name*/*Value* pair; to discard a variable, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *Security* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/column_security.png
:alt: Column dialog security tab
Use the *Security* tab to assign attributes and define security labels. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label selection:
Use the *Security* tab to assign attributes and define security labels. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label selection:
* Specify a security label provider in the *Provider* field. The named provider must be loaded and must consent to the proposed labeling operation.
* Specify a a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
* Specify a a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
Click the *Add* icon (+) to assign additional security labels; to discard a security label, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Column* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Column* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Column* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Column* dialog:
.. image:: images/column_sql.png
:alt: Column dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a column named *territory* in the table named *distributors*.
The example shown demonstrates creating a column named *territory* in the table named *distributors*.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+9 -6
View File
@@ -111,13 +111,16 @@ html_theme = 'classic'
# documentation.
html_theme_options = {
'collapsiblesidebar': True,
'relbarbgcolor': '#2C76B4',
'relbarbgcolor': '#326690',
'sidebarbgcolor': '#E2E2E2',
'sidebarbtncolor': '#2C76B4',
'sidebartextcolor': '#000',
'sidebarlinkcolor': '#337AB7',
'footerbgcolor': '#333',
'codebgcolor': '#D9EDF7',
'sidebarbtncolor': '#326690',
'sidebartextcolor': '#222222',
'sidebarlinkcolor': '#326690',
'footerbgcolor': '#222222',
'codebgcolor': '#d6effc',
'textcolor': '#222222',
'headbgcolor': '#E2E2E2',
'headtextcolor': '#326690',
'bodyfont': '"Helvetica Neue", Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif',
'headfont': '"Helvetica Neue", Helvetica, Arial, sans-serif'
}
+11 -7
View File
@@ -1,22 +1,24 @@
.. _connect_error:
**************************
*************************
`Connection error`:index:
**************************
*************************
When connecting to a PostgreSQL server, you may get an error message. If you encounter an error message, please review the message carefully; each error message attempts to incorporate the information you'll need to resolve the problem. For more details about specific errors, please locate the error message in the list below:
**Connection to the server has been lost**
.. image:: images/ce_timeout.png
:alt: Connection to the server has been lost
This error message indicates that the connection attempt has taken longer than the specified threshold; there may be a problem with the connection properties provided on the *Server* dialog, network connectivity issues, or the server may not be running.
**could not connect to Server: Connection refused**
**could not connect to Server: Connection refused**
.. image:: images/ce_not_running.png
:alt: Could not connect to server
If pgAdmin displays this message, there are two possible reasons for this:
If pgAdmin displays this message, there are two possible reasons for this:
* the database server isn't running - simply start it.
* the server isn't configured to accept TCP/IP requests on the address shown.
@@ -27,12 +29,13 @@ For further information, please refer to the PostgreSQL documentation about `run
**FATAL: no pg_hba.conf entry**
.. image:: images/ce_error_hba.png
:alt: No pg_hba.conf entry
If pgAdmin displays this message when connecting, your server can be contacted correctly over the network, but is not configured to accept your connection. Your client has not been detected as a legal user for the database.
If pgAdmin displays this message when connecting, your server can be contacted correctly over the network, but is not configured to accept your connection. Your client has not been detected as a legal user for the database.
To connect to a server, the pg_hba.conf file on the database server must be configured to accept connections from the host of the pgAdmin client. Modify the pg_hba.conf file on the database server host, and add an entry in the form:
* **host template1 postgres 192.168.0.0/24 md5** for an IPV4 network
* **host template1 postgres 192.168.0.0/24 md5** for an IPV4 network
* **host template1 postgres ::ffff:192.168.0.0/120 md5** for an IPV6 network
For more information, please refer to the PostgreSQL documentation about `client authentication <http://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/interactive/client-authentication.html>`_.
@@ -40,7 +43,8 @@ For more information, please refer to the PostgreSQL documentation about `client
**FATAL: password authentication failed**
.. image:: images/ce_password_failed.png
:alt: Password authentication failed
* The *password authentication failed for user* error message indicates there may be a problem with the password you entered. Retry the password to confirm you entered it correctly. If the error message returns, make sure that you have the correct password, that you are authorized to access the server, and that the access has been correctly configured in the server's postgresql.conf configuration file.
+15 -4
View File
@@ -1,18 +1,29 @@
.. _connect_to_server:
*****************
Connect to server
*****************
**************************
`Connect to server`:index:
**************************
Use the *Connect to Server* dialog to authenticate with a defined server and access the objects stored on the server through the pgAdmin tree control. To access the dialog, right click on the server name in the *pgAdmin* tree control, and select *Connect Server...* from the context menu.
.. image:: images/connect_to_server.png
:alt: Connect to server dialog
Provide authentication information for the selected server:
* Use the *Password* field to provide the password of the user that is associated with the defined server.
* Check the box next to *Save Password* to instruct the server to save the password for future connections; if you save the password, you will not be prompted when reconnecting to the database server with this server definition.
In case of SSH Tunneling, *Connect to Server* dialog will prompt for SSH Tunnel and Database server passwords if not already saved.
.. image:: images/connect_to_tunneled_server.png
:alt: Connect to server dialog
Provide authentication information for the selected server:
* Use the *Password* field to provide the password of the user that is associated with the defined server.
* Check the box next to respective *Save Password* to instruct the server to save the password for future connections; if you save the password, you will not be prompted when reconnecting to the database server with this server definition.
The pgAdmin client displays a message in a green status bar in the lower right corner when the server connects successfully.
If you receive an error message while attempting a connection, verify that your network is allowing the pgAdmin host and the host of the database server to communicate. For detailed information about a specific error message, please see the :ref:`Connection Error <connect_error>` help page.
+25 -7
View File
@@ -1,10 +1,15 @@
.. _connecting:
**********************
Connecting to a Server
**********************
*******************************
`Connecting to a Server`:index:
*******************************
Before you can use the pgAdmin client to manage the objects that reside on your Postgres server, you must define a connection to the server. You can (optionally) use the *Server Group* dialog to create server groups to organize the server connections within the tree control for easier management. To open the *Server Group* dialog, right-click on the *Servers* node of the tree control, and select *Server Group* from the *Create* menu.
Before you can use the pgAdmin client to manage the objects that reside on your
Postgres server, you must define a connection to the server. You can
(optionally) use the *Server Group* dialog to create server groups to organize
the server connections within the tree control for easier management. To open
the *Server Group* dialog, right-click on the *Servers* node of the tree
control, and select *Server Group* from the *Create* menu.
Contents:
@@ -12,7 +17,10 @@ Contents:
server_group_dialog
Use the fields on the *Server* dialog to define the connection properties for each new server that you wish to manage with pgAdmin. To open the *Server* dialog, right-click on the *Servers* node of the tree control, and select *Server* from the *Create* menu.
Use the fields on the *Server* dialog to define the connection properties for
each new server that you wish to manage with pgAdmin. To open the *Server*
dialog, right-click on the *Servers* node of the tree control, and select
*Server* from the *Create* menu.
Contents:
@@ -20,11 +28,21 @@ Contents:
server_dialog
After defining a server connection, right-click on the server name, and select *Connect to server* to authenticate with the server, and start using pgAdmin to manage objects that reside on the server.
After defining a server connection, right-click on the server name, and select
*Connect to server* to authenticate with the server, and start using pgAdmin to
manage objects that reside on the server.
Contents:
.. toctree::
connect_to_server
connect_error
connect_error
Server definitions (and their groups) can be exported to a JSON file and
re-imported to the same or a different system to enable easy pre-configuration
of pgAdmin.
.. toctree::
export_import_servers
+143
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,143 @@
.. _container_deployment:
**************************************
`Container Deployment`:index:
**************************************
pgAdmin can be deployed in a container using the image at:
https://hub.docker.com/r/dpage/pgadmin4/
PostgreSQL Utilities
********************
The PostgreSQL utilities *pg_dump*, *pg_dumpall*, *pg_restore* and *psql* are
included in the container to allow backups to be created and restored and other
maintenance functions to be executed. Multiple versions are included in the
following directories to allow use with different versions of the database
server:
* PostgreSQL 9.4: /usr/local/pgsql-9.4
* PostgreSQL 9.5: /usr/local/pgsql-9.5
* PostgreSQL 9.6: /usr/local/pgsql-9.6
* PostgreSQL 10: /usr/local/pgsql-10
* PostgreSQL 11: /usr/local/pgsql-11
The most recent version of the utilities is used by default; this may be
changed in the :ref:`preferences`.
Environment Variables
*********************
The container will accept the following variables at startup:
*PGADMIN_DEFAULT_EMAIL*
This is the email address used when setting up the initial administrator account
to login to pgAdmin. This variable is required and must be set at launch time.
*PGADMIN_DEFAULT_PASSWORD*
This is the password used when setting up the initial administrator account to
login to pgAdmin. This variable is required and must be set at launch time.
*PGADMIN_ENABLE_TLS*
Default: <null>
If left un-set, the container will listen on port 80 for connections in plain
text. If set to any value, the container will listen on port 443 for TLS
connections.
When TLS is enabled, a certificate and key must be provided. Typically these
should be stored on the host file system and mounted from the container. The
expected paths are /certs/server.crt and /certs/server.key
*PGADMIN_LISTEN_ADDRESS*
Default: [::]
Specify the local address that the servers listens on. The default should work
for most users - in IPv4-only environments, this may need to be set to
127.0.0.1.
*PGADMIN_LISTEN_PORT*
Default: 80 or 443 (if TLS is enabled)
Allows the port that the server listens on to be set to a specific value rather
than using the default.
*GUNICORN_THREADS*
Default: 25
Adjust the number of threads the Gunicorn server uses to handle incoming
requests. This should typically be left as-is, except in highly loaded systems
where it may be increased.
Mapped Files and Directories
****************************
The following files or directories can be mapped from the container onto the
host machine to allow configuration to be customised and shared between
instances:
*/var/lib/pgadmin*
This is the working directory in which pgAdmin stores session data, user files,
configuration files, and it's configuration database. Mapping this directory
onto the host machine gives you an easy way to maintain configuration between
invocations of the container.
*/pgadmin4/config_local.py*
This file can be used to override configuration settings in pgAdmin. Settings
found in config.py can be overridden with deployment specific values if
required.
*/pgadmin4/servers.json*
If this file is mapped, server definitions found in it will be loaded at launch
time. This allows connection information to be pre-loaded into the instance of
pgAdmin in the container.
*/certs/server.cert*
If TLS is enabled, this file will be used as the servers TLS certificate.
*/certs/server.key*
If TLS is enabled, this file will be used as the key file for the servers TLS
certificate.
Examples
********
Run a simple container over port 80:
.. code-block:: bash
docker pull dpage/pgadmin4
docker run -p 80:80 \
-e "PGADMIN_DEFAULT_EMAIL=user@domain.com" \
-e "PGADMIN_DEFAULT_PASSWORD=SuperSecret" \
-d dpage/pgadmin4
Run a TLS secured container using a shared config/storage directory in
/private/var/lib/pgadmin on the host, and servers pre-loaded from
/tmp/servers.json on the host:
.. code-block:: bash
docker pull dpage/pgadmin4
docker run -p 443:443 \
-v "/private/var/lib/pgadmin:/var/lib/pgadmin" \
-v "/path/to/certificate.cert:/certs/server.cert" \
-v "/path/to/certificate.key:/certs/server.key" \
-v "/tmp/servers.json:/servers.json" \
-e "PGADMIN_DEFAULT_EMAIL=user@domain.com" \
-e "PGADMIN_DEFAULT_PASSWORD=SuperSecret" \
-e "PGADMIN_ENABLE_TLS=True" \
-d dpage/pgadmin4
+3 -3
View File
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
.. _contributions:
*****************************
pgAdmin Project Contributions
*****************************
**************************************
`pgAdmin Project Contributions`:index:
**************************************
pgAdmin is an open-source project that invites you to get involved in the development process. For more information about contributing to the pgAdmin project, contact the developers on the pgAdmin mailing list pgadmin-hackers@postgresql.org to discuss any ideas you might have for enhancements or bug fixes.
+21 -16
View File
@@ -1,39 +1,42 @@
.. _database_dialog:
*******************
The Database Dialog
*******************
************************
`Database Dialog`:index:
************************
Use the *Database* dialog to define or modify a database. To create a database, you must be a database superuser or have the CREATE privilege.
Use the *Database* dialog to define or modify a database. To create a database, you must be a database superuser or have the CREATE privilege.
The *Database* dialog organizes the development of a database through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Security*, and *Parameters*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Database* dialog organizes the development of a database through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Security*, and *Parameters*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/database_general.png
:alt: Database dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the database:
* Use the *Database* field to add a descriptive name for the database. The name will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control.
* Select the owner of the database from the drop-down listbox in the *Owner* field.
* Store notes about the database in the *Comment* field.
* Select the owner of the database from the drop-down listbox in the *Owner* field.
* Store notes about the database in the *Comment* field.
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/database_definition.png
:alt: Database dialog definition tab
Use the *Definition* tab to set properties for the database:
* Select a character set from the drop-down listbox in the *Encoding* field. The default is *UTF8*.
* Select a template from the drop-down listbox in the *Template* field. If you do not specify a template, the database will use template1.
* Select a tablespace from the drop-down listbox in the *Tablespace* field. The selected tablespace will be the default tablespace used to contain database objects.
* Select a template from the drop-down listbox in the *Template* field. If you do not specify a template, the database will use template1.
* Select a tablespace from the drop-down listbox in the *Tablespace* field. The selected tablespace will be the default tablespace used to contain database objects.
* Select the collation order from the drop-down listbox in the *Collation* field.
* Select the character classification from the drop-down listbox in the *Character Type* field. This affects the categorization of characters, e.g. lower, upper and digit. The default, or a blank field, uses the character classification of the template database.
* Specify a connection limit in the *Connection Limit* field to configure the maximum number of connection requests. The default value (*-1*) allows unlimited connections to the database.
Click the *Security* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/database_security.png
:alt: Database dialog security tab
Use the *Security* tab to assign privileges and define security labels.
Use the *Security* tab to assign privileges and define security labels.
Use the *Privileges* panel to assign privileges to a role. Click the *Add* icon (+) to set privileges for database objects:
@@ -43,16 +46,17 @@ Use the *Privileges* panel to assign privileges to a role. Click the *Add* icon
Click add to set additional privileges; to discard a privilege, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Use the *Security Labels* panel to define security labels applied to the database. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label selection:
Use the *Security Labels* panel to define security labels applied to the database. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label selection:
* Specify a security label provider in the *Provider* field. The named provider must be loaded and must consent to the proposed labeling operation.
* Specify a a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
* Specify a a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
To discard a security label, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *Parameters* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/database_parameters.png
:alt: Database dialog parameters tab
Use the *Parameters* tab to set parameters for the database. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each parameter:
@@ -68,12 +72,13 @@ Your entries in the *Database* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example bel
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Database* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Database* dialog:
.. image:: images/database_sql.png
:alt: Database dialog sql tab
The example creates a database named *hr* that is owned by *postgres*. It allows unlimited connections, and is available to all authenticated users.
The example creates a database named *hr* that is owned by *postgres*. It allows unlimited connections, and is available to all authenticated users.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+16 -6
View File
@@ -5,13 +5,14 @@
*************************
.. image:: images/debug_main.png
:alt: Debugger page
The debugger may be used to debug PL/pgSQL functions in PostgreSQL, as well as EDB-SPL functions, stored procedures and packages in Advanced Server. The Debugger is available as an extension for your PostgreSQL installation, and is distributed as part of Advanced Server. You must have superuser privileges to use the debugger.
The debugger may be used to debug PL/pgSQL functions in PostgreSQL, as well as EDB-SPL functions, stored procedures and packages in Advanced Server. The Debugger is available as an extension for your PostgreSQL installation, and is distributed as part of Advanced Server. You must have superuser privileges to use the debugger.
Before using the debugger, you must modify the *postgresql.conf* file, adding the server-side debugger components to the the value of the *shared_preload_libraries* parameter:
shared_preload_libraries = '$libdir/*other_libraries*/plugin_debugger'
After modifying the *shared_preload_libraries* parameter, restart the server to apply the changes.
The debugger may be used for either in-context debugging or direct debugging of a target function or procedure. When you use the debugger for in-context debugging, you set a breakpoint at the first line of a program; when a session invokes the target, control is transferred to the debugger. When using direct debugging, the debugger prompts you for any parameters required by the target, and then allows you to step through the code.
@@ -21,10 +22,12 @@ The debugger may be used for either in-context debugging or direct debugging of
To set a breakpoint at the first line of a program, right-click the name of the object you would like to debug, and select *Set breakpoint* from the *Debugging* sub-menu. The debugger window will open, waiting for another session to invoke the program.
.. image:: images/debug_set_breakpoint.png
:alt: Debugger set a breakpoint demo
When another session invokes the target, the debugger will display the code, allowing you to add break points, or step through line-by-line. The other session is suspended until the debugging completes; then control is returned to the session.
.. image:: images/debug_ic_step_in.png
:alt: Debugger step-in demo
**Direct Debugging**
@@ -32,6 +35,7 @@ When another session invokes the target, the debugger will display the code, all
To use the debugger for direct debugging, right click on the name of the object that you wish to debug in the pgAdmin tree control and select *Debug* from the *Debugging* sub-menu. The debugger window will open, prompting you for any values required by the program:
.. image:: images/debug_params.png
:alt: Debugger parameter dialog
Use the fields on the *Debugger* dialog to provide a value for each parameter:
@@ -39,13 +43,14 @@ Use the fields on the *Debugger* dialog to provide a value for each parameter:
* The *Type* field contains the parameter data type.
* Check the *Null?* checkbox to indicate that the parameter is a NULL value.
* Check the *Expression?* checkbox if the Value field contains an expression.
* Use the *Value* field to provide the parameter value that will be passed to the program. When entering parameter values, type the value into the appropriate cell on the grid, or, leave the cell empty to represent NULL, enter '' (two single quotes) to represent an empty string, or to enter a literal string consisting of just two single quotes, enter \'\'. PostgreSQL 8.4 and above supports variadic function parameters. These may be entered as a comma-delimited list of values, quoted and/or cast as required.
* Use the *Value* field to provide the parameter value that will be passed to the program. When entering parameter values, type the value into the appropriate cell on the grid, or, leave the cell empty to represent NULL, enter '' (two single quotes) to represent an empty string, or to enter a literal string consisting of just two single quotes, enter \'\'. PostgreSQL 8.4 and above supports variadic function parameters. These may be entered as a comma-delimited list of values, quoted and/or cast as required.
* Check the *Use default?* checkbox to indicate that the program should use the value in the Default Value field.
* The *Default Value* field contains the default value of the parameter.
* The *Default Value* field contains the default value of the parameter.
Provide values required by the program, and click the *Debug* button to start stepping through the program.
Provide values required by the program, and click the *Debug* button to start stepping through the program.
.. image:: images/debug_step_in.png
:alt: Debugger step-in demo
**Using the Debugger**
@@ -53,6 +58,7 @@ Provide values required by the program, and click the *Debug* button to start st
The main debugger window consists of two panels and a context-sensitive toolbar. Use toolbar icons to manage breakpoints and step into or through code; hover over an icon for a tooltip that identifies the option associated with the icon. The toolbar options are:
.. image:: images/debug_toolbar.png
:alt: Debugger navigation toolbar
+-------------------------+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Option | Action |
@@ -72,9 +78,10 @@ The main debugger window consists of two panels and a context-sensitive toolbar.
| *Stop* | Click the *Stop* icon to halt the execution of a program. |
+-------------------------+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
The top panel of the debugger window displays the program body; click in the grey margin next to a line number to add a breakpoint. The highlighted line in the top panel is the line that is about to execute.
The top panel of the debugger window displays the program body; click in the grey margin next to a line number to add a breakpoint. The highlighted line in the top panel is the line that is about to execute.
.. image:: images/debug_main.png
:alt: Debugger main window
The lower panel of the debugger window provides a set of tabs that allow you to review information about the program:
@@ -87,14 +94,17 @@ The lower panel of the debugger window provides a set of tabs that allow you to
As you step through a program, the *Local variables* tab displays the current value of each variable:
.. image:: images/debug_variables.png
:alt: Debugger local variables tab
When you step into a subroutine, the *Stack* tab displays the call stack, including the name of each caller, the parameter values for each caller (if any), and the line number within each caller:
.. image:: images/debug_stack.png
:alt: Debugger local stack tab
Select a caller to change focus to that stack frame and display the state of the caller in the upper panel.
When the program completes, the *Results* tab displays the message returned by the server. If the program encounters an error, the *Messages* tab displays details:
.. image:: images/debug_error_message.png
:alt: Debugger error message
+10 -5
View File
@@ -1,10 +1,14 @@
.. _deployment:
******************
pgAdmin Deployment
******************
***************************
`pgAdmin Deployment`:index:
***************************
Pre-compiled and configured installation packages for pgAdmin 4 are available for a number of desktop environments; we recommend using an installer whenever possible. If you are interested in learning more about the project, or if a pgAdmin installer is not available for your environment, the pages listed below will provide detailed information about creating a custom deployment.
Pre-compiled and configured installation packages for pgAdmin 4 are available
for a number of desktop environments; we recommend using an installer whenever
possible. If you are interested in learning more about the project, or if a
pgAdmin installer is not available for your environment, the pages listed below
will provide detailed information about creating a custom deployment.
Contents:
@@ -12,4 +16,5 @@ Contents:
:maxdepth: 2
desktop_deployment
server_deployment
server_deployment
container_deployment
+32 -20
View File
@@ -1,17 +1,32 @@
.. _desktop_deployment:
******************
Desktop Deployment
******************
***************************
`Desktop Deployment`:index:
***************************
pgAdmin may be deployed as a desktop application by configuring the application
to run in desktop mode and then utilising the desktop runtime to host and
display the program on a supported Windows, Mac OS X or Linux installation.
to run in desktop mode and then utilising the desktop runtime to host the
program on a supported Windows, Mac OS X or Linux installation.
**Note: Pre-compiled and configured installation packages are available for
a number of platforms. These packages should be used by end-users whereever
possible - the following information is useful for the maintainers of those
packages and users interested in understanding how pgAdmin works.**
The desktop runtime is a system-tray application that when launched, runs the
pgAdmin server and launches a web browser to render the user interface. If
additional instances of pgAdmin are launched, a new browser tab will be opened
and be served by the existing instance of the server in order to minimise system
resource utilisation. Clicking the icon in the system tray will present a menu
offering options to open a new pgAdmin window, configure the runtime, view the
server log and shut down the server.
.. note:: Pre-compiled and configured installation packages are available for
a number of platforms. These packages should be used by end-users whereever
possible - the following information is useful for the maintainers of those
packages and users interested in understanding how pgAdmin works.
.. seealso:: For detailed instructions on building and configuring pgAdmin from
scratch, please see the README file in the top level directory of the source code.
For convenience, you can find the latest version of the file
`here <https://git.postgresql.org/gitweb/?p=pgadmin4.git;a=blob_plain;f=README>`_,
but be aware that this may differ from the version included with the source code
for a specific version of pgAdmin.
Configuration
*************
@@ -36,10 +51,10 @@ are as follows:
for end users to change any default or packaging specific settings that they may
wish to adjust to meet local preferences or standards.
NOTE: If the SERVER_MODE setting is changed in ``config_distro.py`` or ``config_local.py``,
you will most likely need to re-set the LOG_FILE, SQLITE_PATH, SESSION_DB_PATH
and STORAGE_DIR values as well as they will have been set based on the default
configuration or overridden by the runtime.
.. note:: If the SERVER_MODE setting is changed in ``config_distro.py`` or ``config_local.py``,
you will most likely need to re-set the LOG_FILE, SQLITE_PATH, SESSION_DB_PATH
and STORAGE_DIR values as well as they will have been set based on the default
configuration or overridden by the runtime.
Runtime
-------
@@ -53,7 +68,7 @@ semi-colon character, for example:
.. code-block:: bash
/Users/dpage/.virtualenvs/pgadmin4/lib/python2.7/site-packages/;/Users/dpage/python-libs/
The configuration settings are stored using the QSettings class in Qt, which
will use an INI file on Unix systems (~/.config/pgadmin/pgadmin4.conf),
a plist file on Mac OS X (~/Library/Preferences/org.pgadmin.pgadmin4.plist),
@@ -66,13 +81,10 @@ The configuration settings:
+==========================+====================+===============================================================+
| ApplicationPath | String | The directory containing pgAdmin4.py |
+--------------------------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
| BrowserCommand | String | An alternate command to run instead of the default browser. |
+--------------------------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
| ConnectionTimeout | Integer | The number of seconds to wait for application server startup. |
+--------------------------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
| PythonPath | String | The Python module search path |
+--------------------------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
| Browser/Geometry | Binary | The runtime window's size/shape |
+--------------------------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
| Browser/WindowState | Binary | The runtime window's state |
+--------------------------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
| Browser/Zoom | String | The runtime window's zoom level (zoom % / 100) |
+--------------------------+--------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------+
+4 -3
View File
@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
.. _developer_tools:
***************
Developer Tools
***************
************************
`Developer Tools`:index:
************************
The pgAdmin *Tools* menu displays a list of powerful developer tools that you can use to execute and analyze complex SQL commands, manage data, and debug PL/SQL code.
@@ -12,3 +12,4 @@ Contents:
debugger
query_tool
editgrid
+14 -11
View File
@@ -1,15 +1,16 @@
.. _domain_constraint_dialog:
*****************************
The Domain Constraints Dialog
*****************************
**********************************
`Domain Constraints Dialog`:index:
**********************************
Use the *Domain Constraints* dialog to create or modify a domain constraint. A domain constraint confirms that the values provided for a domain meet a defined criteria. The *Domain Constraints* dialog implements options of the ALTER DOMAIN command.
Use the *Domain Constraints* dialog to create or modify a domain constraint. A domain constraint confirms that the values provided for a domain meet a defined criteria. The *Domain Constraints* dialog implements options of the ALTER DOMAIN command.
The *Domain Constraints* dialog organizes the development of a domain constraint through the following dialog tabs: *General* and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Domain Constraints* dialog organizes the development of a domain constraint through the following dialog tabs: *General* and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/domain_constraint_general.png
:alt: Domain constraint dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the domain constraint:
* Use the *Name* field to add a descriptive name for the constraint. The name will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control.
@@ -18,11 +19,12 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the domain constraint:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/domain_constraint_definition.png
:alt: Domain constraint dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the domain constraint:
* Use the *Check* field to provide a CHECK expression. A CHECK expression specifies a constraint that the domain must satisfy. A constraint must produce a Boolean result; include the key word VALUE to refer to the value being tested. Only those expressions that evaluate to TRUE or UNKNOWN will succeed. A CHECK expression cannot contain subqueries or refer to variables other than VALUE. If a domain has multiple CHECK constraints, they will be tested in alphabetical order.
* Move the *Validate?* switch to the *No* position to mark the constraint NOT VALID. If the constraint is marked NOT VALID, the constraint will not be applied to existing column data. The default value is *Yes*.
* Move the *Validate?* switch to the *No* position to mark the constraint NOT VALID. If the constraint is marked NOT VALID, the constraint will not be applied to existing column data. The default value is *Yes*.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
@@ -30,16 +32,17 @@ Your entries in the *Domain Constraints* dialog generate a SQL command (see an e
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Domain Constraints* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Domain Constraints* dialog:
.. image:: images/domain_constraint_sql.png
:alt: Domain constraint dialog general tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a domain constraint on the domain *timesheets* named *weekday*. It constrains a value to equal *Friday*.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
* Click the *Reset* button to restore configuration parameters.
+16 -11
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _domain_dialog:
*****************
The Domain Dialog
*****************
**********************
`Domain Dialog`:index:
**********************
Use the *Domain* dialog to define a domain. A domain is a data type definition that may constrain permissible values. Domains are useful when you are creating multiple tables that contain comparable columns; you can create a domain that defines constraints that are common to the columns and re-use the domain definition when creating the columns, rather than individually defining each set of constraints.
Use the *Domain* dialog to define a domain. A domain is a data type definition that may constrain permissible values. Domains are useful when you are creating multiple tables that contain comparable columns; you can create a domain that defines constraints that are common to the columns and re-use the domain definition when creating the columns, rather than individually defining each set of constraints.
The *Domain* dialog organizes the development of a domain through the following tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Constraints*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Domain* dialog organizes the development of a domain through the following tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Constraints*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/domain_general.png
:alt: Domain dialog general tab
Use the fields on the *General* tab to identify a domain:
@@ -20,6 +21,7 @@ Use the fields on the *General* tab to identify a domain:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/domain_definition.png
:alt: Domain dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to describe the domain:
@@ -28,25 +30,27 @@ Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to describe the domain:
* Use the context-sensitive *Precision* field to specify the total count of significant digits for a numeric type.
* Specify a default value for the domain data type in the *Default* field. The data type of the default expression must match the data type of the domain. If no default value is specified, then the default value is the null value.
* Move the *Not Null* switch to specify the values of this domain are prevented from being null.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Collation* to apply a collation cast. If no collation is specified, the underlying data type's default collation is used. The underlying type must be collatable if COLLATE is specified.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Collation* to apply a collation cast. If no collation is specified, the underlying data type's default collation is used. The underlying type must be collatable if COLLATE is specified.
Click the *Constraints* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/domain_constraints.png
:alt: Domain dialog constraints tab
Use the fields in the *Constraints* tab to specify rules for the domain. Click the *Add* icon (+) to set constraints:
* Use the *Name* field to specify a name for the constraint.
* Use the *Check* field to provide an expression for the constraint.
* Use the *Validate* checkbox to determine whether the constraint will be validated. The default checkbox is checked and sets a validation requirement.
* Use the *Validate* checkbox to determine whether the constraint will be validated. The default checkbox is checked and sets a validation requirement.
A CHECK clause specifies an integrity test which values of the domain must satisfy. Each constraint must be an expression that produces a Boolean result. Use the key word VALUE to refer to the value being tested. Expressions evaluating to TRUE or UNKNOWN succeed. If the expression produces a FALSE result, an error is reported and the value is not allowed to be converted to the domain type. A CHECK expression cannot contain subqueries nor refer to variables other than VALUE. If a domain has multiple CHECK constraints, they will be tested in alphabetical order by name.
A CHECK clause specifies an integrity test which values of the domain must satisfy. Each constraint must be an expression that produces a Boolean result. Use the key word VALUE to refer to the value being tested. Expressions evaluating to TRUE or UNKNOWN succeed. If the expression produces a FALSE result, an error is reported and the value is not allowed to be converted to the domain type. A CHECK expression cannot contain subqueries nor refer to variables other than VALUE. If a domain has multiple CHECK constraints, they will be tested in alphabetical order by name.
Click the *Add* icon (+) to set additional constraints; to discard a constraint, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *Security* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/domain_security.png
:alt: Domain dialog security tab
Use the *Security Labels* panel to assign security labels. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add a label:
@@ -61,12 +65,13 @@ Your entries in the *Domain* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by selections made in the *Domain* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by selections made in the *Domain* dialog:
.. image:: images/domain_sql.png
:alt: Domain dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a domain named *minimum-wage* that confirms that the value entered is greater than or equal to *7.25*.
The example shown demonstrates creating a domain named *minimum-wage* that confirms that the value entered is greater than or equal to *7.25*.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+144
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
.. _editgrid:
***********************************
`Reviewing and Editing Data`:index:
***********************************
To review or modify data, right click on a table or view name in the *Browser* tree control. When the context menu opens, use the *View/Edit Data* menu to specify the number of rows you would like to display in the editor panel.
.. image:: images/editgrid.png
:alt: Edit grid window
To modify the content of a table, each row in the table must be uniquely identifiable. If the table definition does not include an OID or a primary key, the displayed data is read only. Note that views cannot be edited; updatable views (using rules) are not supported.
The editor features a toolbar that allows quick access to frequently used options, and a work environment divided into two panels:
* The upper panel displays the SQL command that was used to select the content displayed in the lower panel.
* The lower panel (the Data Grid) displays the data selected from the table or view.
**The View/Edit Data Toolbar**
The toolbar includes context-sensitive icons that provide shortcuts to frequently performed tasks.
.. image:: images/editgrid_toolbar.png
:alt: Edit grid toolbar
Hover over an icon to display a tooltip that describes the icon's functionality.
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| Icon | Behavior | Shortcut |
+======================+===================================================================================================+=============+
| *Save* | Use the *Save* icon to save your changes to the currently displayed table contents. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Find* | Use options on the *Find* menu to access Search and Replace functionality or to Jump to another | Ctrl/Cmd +F |
| | line. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Copy* | Click the *Copy* icon to copy the currently selected data. | Ctrl+C |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Paste Row* | Click the *Paste Row* icon to paste the content that is currently on the clipboard. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Delete Row* | Use the *Delete Row* icon to delete all the selected rows from the output panel. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Filter* | Click the *Filter* icon to open a dialog that allows you to write and apply a filter for the | |
| | content currently displayed in the output panel. Click the down arrow to open the *Filter* drop- | |
| | down menu and select from pre-defined options: | |
| | | |
| | Use options on the *Filter* menu to quick-sort or quick-filter the data set: | |
| | | |
| | * Filter: This option opens a dialog that allows you to define a filter. A filter is a | |
| | condition that is supplied to an arbitrary WHERE clause that restricts the result set. | |
| | | |
| | * Remove Filter: This option removes all selection / exclusion filter conditions. | |
| | | |
| | * By Selection: This option refreshes the data set and displays only those rows whose | |
| | column value matches the value in the cell currently selected. | |
| | | |
| | * Exclude Selection: This option refreshes the data set and excludes those rows whose | |
| | column value matches the value in the cell currently selected. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *No limit* | Use the *No limit* drop-down listbox to specify how many rows to display in the output panel. | |
| | Select from: *No limit* (the default), *1000 rows*, *500 rows*, or *100 rows*. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Execute/Refresh* | Click the *Execute/Refresh* icon to execute the SQL command that is displayed in the top panel. | F5 |
| | If you have not saved modifications to the content displayed in the data grid, you will be | |
| | prompted to confirm the execution. To preserve your changes before refreshing the content, click | |
| | the *Save* toolbar button before executing the refresh. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Stop* | Click the *Stop* icon to cancel the execution of the currently running query. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Clear History* | Use the *Clear History* drop-down menu to erase the contents of the *History* tab. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
| *Download as CSV* | Click the *Download as CSV* icon to download the result set of the current query to a | F8 |
| | comma-separated list. You can control the CSV settings through | |
| | *Preferences -> SQL Editor -> CSV output* dialogue. | |
+----------------------+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+-------------+
**The Data Grid**
The top row of the data grid displays the name of each column, the data type, and if applicable, the number of characters allowed. A column that is part of the primary key will additionally be marked with [PK].
To modify the displayed data:
* To change a numeric value within the grid, double-click the value to select the field. Modify the content in the square in which it is displayed.
* To change a non-numeric value within the grid, double-click the content to access the edit bubble. After modifying the contentof the edit bubble, click the *Save* button to display your changes in the data grid, or *Cancel* to exit the edit bubble without saving.
To enter a newline character, click Ctrl-Enter or Shift-Enter. Newline formatting is only displayed when the field content is accessed via an edit bubble.
To add a new row to the table, enter data into the last (unnumbered) row of the table. As soon as you store the data, the row is assigned a row number, and a fresh empty line is added to the data grid.
To write a SQL NULL to the table, simply leave the field empty. When you store the new row, the will server fill in the default value for that column. If you store a change to an existing row, the value NULL will explicitly be written.
To write an empty string to the table, enter the special string '' (two single quotes) in the field. If you want to write a string containing solely two single quotes to the table, you need to escape these quotes, by typing \'\'
To delete a row, press the *Delete* toolbar button. A popup will open, asking you to confirm the deletion.
To commit the changes to the server, select the *Save* toolbar button. Modifications to a row are written to the server automatically when you select a different row.
**Geometry Data Viewer**
If PostGIS is installed, you can view GIS objects in a map by selecting row(s) and clicking the 'View Geometry' button in the column. If no rows are selected, the entire data set will be rendered:
.. image:: images/geometry_viewer.png
:alt: Geometry Viewer Button
You can adjust the layout by dragging the title of the panel. To view the properties of the geometries directly in map, just click the specific geometry:
.. image:: images/geometry_viewer_property_table.png
:alt: Geometry Viewer Property Table
Notes:
- *Supported data types:* The Geometry Viewer supports 2D and 3DM geometries in EWKB format including `Point, LineString, Polygon MultiPoint, MultiLineString, MultiPolygon and GeometryCollection`.
- *SRIDs:* If there are geometries with different SRIDs in the same column, the viewer will render geometries with the same SRID in the map. If SRID=4326 the OSM tile layer will be added into the map.
- *Data size:* For performance reasons, the viewer will render no more than 100000 geometries, totaling up to 20MB.
- *Internet access:* An internet connection is required for the Geometry Viewer to function correctly.
**Sort/Filter options dialog**
You can access *Sort/Filter options dialog* by clicking on Sort/Filter button. This allows you to specify an SQL Filter to limit the data displayed and data sorting options in the edit grid window:
.. image:: images/editgrid_filter_dialog.png
:alt: Edit grid filter dialog window
* Use *SQL Filter* to provide SQL filtering criteria. These will be added to the "WHERE" clause of the query used to retrieve the data. For example, you might enter:
.. code-block:: sql
id > 25 AND created > '2018-01-01'
* Use *Data Sorting* to sort the data in the output grid
To add new column(s) in data sorting grid, click on the [+] icon.
* Use the drop-down *Column* to select the column you want to sort.
* Use the drop-down *Order* to select the sort order for the column.
To delete a row from the grid, click the trash icon.
* Click the *Help* button (?) to access online help.
* Click the *Ok* button to save work.
* Click the *Close* button to discard current changes and close the dialog.
+17 -13
View File
@@ -1,24 +1,26 @@
.. _event_trigger_dialog:
************************
The Event Trigger Dialog
************************
Use the *Domain Trigger* dialog to define an event trigger. Unlike regular triggers, which are attached to a single table and capture only DML events, event triggers are global to a particular database and are capable of capturing DDL events. Like regular triggers, event triggers can be written in any procedural language that includes event trigger support, or in C, but not in SQL.
*****************************
`Event Trigger Dialog`:index:
*****************************
The *Domain Trigger* dialog organizes the development of a event trigger through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, and *Security Labels*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
Use the *Domain Trigger* dialog to define an event trigger. Unlike regular triggers, which are attached to a single table and capture only DML events, event triggers are global to a particular database and are capable of capturing DDL events. Like regular triggers, event triggers can be written in any procedural language that includes event trigger support, or in C, but not in SQL.
The *Domain Trigger* dialog organizes the development of a event trigger through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, and *Security Labels*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/event_trigger_general.png
:alt: Event trigger dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the event trigger:
* Use the *Name* field to add a descriptive name for the event trigger. The name will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Owner* to specify the owner of the event trigger.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Owner* to specify the owner of the event trigger.
* Store notes about the event trigger in the *Comment* field.
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/event_trigger_definition.png
:alt: Event trigger dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the event trigger:
@@ -27,29 +29,31 @@ Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the event trigger:
* Select a radio button in the *Events* field to specify when the event trigger will fire: *DDL COMMAND START*, *DDL COMMAND END*, or *SQL DROP*.
* Use the *When* field to write a condition for the event trigger that must be satisfied before the event trigger can execute.
Click the *Security Labels* tab to continue.
Click the *Security Labels* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/event_trigger_security.png
:alt: Event trigger dialog security tab
Use the *Security* tab to define security labels applied to the trigger. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label.
Use the *Security* tab to define security labels applied to the trigger. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label.
* Specify a security label provider in the *Provider* field. The named provider must be loaded and must consent to the proposed labeling operation.
* Specify a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
* Specify a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
Click the *Add* icon (+) to assign additional security labels; to discard a security label, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Domain Trigger* dialog generate a generate a SQL command. Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Domain Trigger* dialog generate a generate a SQL command. Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Domain Trigger* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Domain Trigger* dialog:
.. image:: images/event_trigger_sql.png
:alt: Event trigger dialog sql tab
The command creates an event trigger named *accounts* that invokes the procedure named *acct_due*.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+21 -15
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _exclusion_constraint_dialog:
*******************************
The Exclusion constraint Dialog
*******************************
************************************
`Exclusion constraint Dialog`:index:
************************************
Use the *Exclusion constraint* dialog to define or modify the behavior of an exclusion constraint. An exclusion constraint guarantees that if any two rows are compared on the specified column or expression (using the specified operator), at least one of the operator comparisons will return false or null.
The *Exclusion constraint* dialog organizes the development of an exclusion constraint through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, and *Columns*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Exclusion constraint* dialog organizes the development of an exclusion constraint through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, and *Columns*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/exclusion_constraint_general.png
:alt: Exclusion constraint dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the exclusion constraint:
@@ -17,17 +18,18 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the exclusion constraint:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/exclusion_constraint_definition.png
:alt: Exclusion constraint dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the exclusion constraint:
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Tablespace* to select the tablespace in which the index associated with the exclude constraint will reside.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Access method* to specify the type of index that will be used when implementing the exclusion constraint:
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Tablespace* to select the tablespace in which the index associated with the exclude constraint will reside.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Access method* to specify the type of index that will be used when implementing the exclusion constraint:
* Select *gist* to specify a GiST index.
* Select *spgist* to specify a space-partitioned GiST index.
* Select *btree* to specify a B-tree index.
* Select *hash* to specify a hash index.
* Select *gist* to specify a GiST index.
* Select *spgist* to specify a space-partitioned GiST index.
* Select *btree* to specify a B-tree index.
* Select *hash* to specify a hash index.
* Use the *Fill Factor* field to specify a fill factor for the table and associated index. The fill factor is a percentage between 10 and 100. 100 (complete packing) is the default.
* Move the *Deferrable?* switch to the *Yes* position to specify that the timing of the constraint is deferrable, and can be postponed until the end of the statement. The default is *No*.
* If enabled, move the *Deferred?* switch to the *Yes* position to specify the timing of the constraint is deferred to the end of the statement. The default is *No*.
@@ -36,8 +38,9 @@ Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the exclusion constraint:
Click the *Columns* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/exclusion_constraint_columns.png
:alt: Exclusion constraint dialog columns tab
Use the fields in the *Columns* tab to to specify the column(s) to which the constraint applies. Use the drop-down listbox next to *Column* to select a column and click the *Add* icon (+) to provide details of the action on the column:
Use the fields in the *Columns* tab to to specify the column(s) to which the constraint applies. Use the drop-down listbox next to *Column* to select a column and click the *Add* icon (+) to provide details of the action on the column:
* The *Column* field is populated with the selection made in the *Column* drop-down listbox.
* If applicable, use the drop-down listbox in the *Operator class* to specify the operator class that will be used by the index for the column.
@@ -45,15 +48,18 @@ Use the fields in the *Columns* tab to to specify the column(s) to which the con
* Use the *NULLs order* column to specify the placement of NULL values (when sorted). Specify *FIRST* or *LAST*.
* Use the drop-down list next to *Operator* to specify a comparison or conditional operator.
Use *Include columns* field to specify columns for *INCLUDE* clause of the constraint. This option is available in Postgres 11 and later.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Exclusion Constraint* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Exclusion Constraint* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Exclusion Constraint* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Exclusion Constraint* dialog:
.. image:: images/exclusion_constraint_sql.png
:alt: Exclusion constraint dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating an exclusion constraint named *exclude_department* that restricts additions to the dept table to those additions that are not equal to the value of the *deptno* column. The constraint uses a btree index.
+117
View File
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
.. _export_import_servers:
****************************************
`Exporting and importing Servers`:index:
****************************************
Server definitions (and their groups) can be exported to a JSON file and
re-imported to the same or a different system to enable easy pre-configuration
of pgAdmin. The ``setup.py`` script is used for this purpose.
.. note:: To export or import servers, you must use the Python interpreter that
is normally used to run pgAdmin to ensure that the required Python
packages are available. In most packages, this can be found in the
Python Virtual Environment that can be found in the installation
directory. When using platform-native packages, the system installation
of Python may be the one used by pgAdmin.
**Exporting Servers**
To export the servers defined in an installation, simply invoke ``setup.py`` with
the ``--dump-servers`` command line option, followed by the name (and if required,
path) to the desired output file. By default, servers owned by the desktop mode
user will be dumped (pgadmin4@pgadmin.org by default - see the DESKTOP_USER
setting in ``config.py``). This can be overridden with the ``--user`` command
line option. For example:
.. code-block:: bash
/path/to/python /path/to/setup.py --dump-servers output_file.json
# or, to specify a non-default user name:
/path/to/python /path/to/setup.py --dump-servers output_file.json --user user@example.com
To export only certain servers, use the ``--servers`` option and list one or
more server IDs. For example:
.. code-block:: bash
/path/to/python /path/to/setup.py --dump-servers output_file.json --server 1 2 5
**Importing Servers**
To import the servers defined in a JSON file, simply invoke ``setup.py`` with
the ``--load-servers`` command line option, followed by the name (and if required,
path) of the JSON file containing the server definitions. Servers will be owned
by the desktop mode user (pgadmin4@pgadmin.org by default - see the DESKTOP_USER
setting in ``config.py``). This can be overridden with the ``--user`` command
line option. For example:
.. code-block:: bash
/path/to/python /path/to/setup.py --load-servers input_file.json
# or, to specify a non-default user name to own the new servers:
/path/to/python /path/to/setup.py --load-servers input_file.json --user user@example.com
If any Servers are defined with a Server Group that is not already present in
the configuration database, the required Group will be created.
**JSON format**
The JSON file format used when importing or exporting servers is quite
straightforward and simply contains a list of servers, with a number of
attributes. The following attributes are required to be present in every server
definition: Name, Group, Port, Username, SSLMode, MaintenanceDB and one of Host,
HostAddr or Service.
Password fields cannot be imported or exported.
The following example shows both a minimally defined and a fully defined server:
.. code-block:: python
{
"Servers": {
"1": {
"Name": "Minimally Defined Server",
"Group": "Server Group 1",
"Port": 5432,
"Username": "postgres",
"Host": "localhost",
"SSLMode": "prefer",
"MaintenanceDB": "postgres"
},
"2": {
"Name: "Fully Defined Server",
"Group": "Server Group 2",
"Host": "host.domain.com",
"HostAddr": "192.168.1.2",
"Port": 5432,
"MaintenanceDB": "postgres",
"Username": "postgres",
"Role": "my_role_name",
"SSLMode": "require",
"Comment": "This server has every option configured in the JSON",
"DBRestriction": "live_db test_db",
"PassFile": "/path/to/pgpassfile",
"SSLCert": "/path/to/sslcert.crt",
"SSLKey": "/path/to/sslcert.key",
"SSLRootCert": "/path/to/sslroot.crt",
"SSLCrl": "/path/to/sslcrl.crl",
"SSLCompression": 1,
"BGColor": "#ff9900",
"FGColor": "#000000",
"Service": "postgresql-10",
"Timeout": 60,
"UseSSHTunnel": 1,
"TunnelHost": "192.168.1.253",
"TunnelPort": 22,
"TunnelUsername": "username",
"TunnelAuthentication": 0
}
}
}
+14 -11
View File
@@ -1,41 +1,44 @@
.. _extension_dialog:
********************
The Extension Dialog
********************
*************************
`Extension Dialog`:index:
*************************
Use the *Extension* dialog to install a new extension into the current database. An extension is a collection of SQL objects that add targeted functionality to your Postgres installation. The *Extension* dialog adds the functionality of an extension to the current database only; you must register the extension in each database that use the extension. Before you load an extension into a database, you should confirm that any pre-requisite files are installed.
The *Extension* dialog allows you to implement options of the CREATE EXTENSION command through the following dialog tabs: *General* and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Extension* dialog allows you to implement options of the CREATE EXTENSION command through the following dialog tabs: *General* and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/extension_general.png
:alt: Extension dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify an extension:
* Use the drop-down listbox in the *Name* field to select the extension. Each extension must have a unique name.
* Store notes about the extension in the *Comment* field.
* Store notes about the extension in the *Comment* field.
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/extension_definition.png
:alt: Extension dialog definition tab
Use the *Definition* tab to select the *Schema* and *Version*:
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Schema* to select the name of the schema in which to install the extension's objects.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Version* to select the version of the extension to install.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Schema* to select the name of the schema in which to install the extension's objects.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Version* to select the version of the extension to install.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Extension* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Extension* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Extension* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Extension* dialog:
.. image:: images/extension_sql.png
:alt: Extension dialog sql tab
The command creates the *chkpass* extension in the *public* schema. It is version *1.0* of *chkpass*.
The command creates the *chkpass* extension in the *public* schema. It is version *1.0* of *chkpass*.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+16 -11
View File
@@ -1,46 +1,50 @@
.. _foreign_data_wrapper_dialog:
*******************************
The Foreign Data Wrapper Dialog
*******************************
************************************
`Foreign Data Wrapper Dialog`:index:
************************************
Use the *Foreign Data Wrapper* dialog to create or modify a foreign data wrapper. A foreign data wrapper is an adapter between a Postgres database and data stored on another data source.
Use the *Foreign Data Wrapper* dialog to create or modify a foreign data wrapper. A foreign data wrapper is an adapter between a Postgres database and data stored on another data source.
You must be a superuser to create a foreign data wrapper.
The *Foreign Data Wrapper* dialog organizes the development of a foreign data wrapper through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Options*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Foreign Data Wrapper* dialog organizes the development of a foreign data wrapper through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Options*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/foreign_data_wrapper_general.png
:alt: Foreign data wrapper dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the foreign data wrapper:
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the foreign data wrapper:
* Use the *Name* field to add a descriptive name for the foreign data wrapper. A foreign data wrapper name must be unique within the database. The name will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Owner* to select the name of the role that will own the foreign data wrapper.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Owner* to select the name of the role that will own the foreign data wrapper.
* Store notes about the foreign data wrapper in the *Comment* field.
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_data_wrapper_definition.png
:alt: Foreign data wrapper dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to set parameters:
* Select the name of the handler function from the drop-down listbox in the *Handler* field. This is the name of an existing function that will be called to retrieve the execution functions for foreign tables.
* Select the name of the handler function from the drop-down listbox in the *Handler* field. This is the name of an existing function that will be called to retrieve the execution functions for foreign tables.
* Select the name of the validator function from the drop-down listbox in the *Validator* field. This is the name of an existing function that will be called to check the generic options given to the foreign data wrapper, as well as options for foreign servers, user mappings and foreign tables using the foreign data wrapper.
Click the *Options* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_data_wrapper_options.png
:alt: Foreign data wrapper dialog options tab
Use the fields in the *Options* tab to specify options:
* Click the the *Add* icon (+) button to add an option/value pair for the foreign data wrapper. Supported option/value pairs will be specific to the selected foreign data wrapper.
* Specify the option name in the *Option* field and provide a corresponding value in the *Value* field.
* Specify the option name in the *Option* field and provide a corresponding value in the *Value* field.
Click the *Add* icon (+) to specify each additional pair; to discard an option, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *Security* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_data_wrapper_security.png
:alt: Foreign data wrapper dialog security tab
Use the *Security* tab to assign security privileges. Click the *Add* icon (+) to assign a set of privileges.
@@ -56,12 +60,13 @@ Your entries in the *Foreign Data Wrapper* dialog generate a SQL command (see an
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Foreign Data Wrapper* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Foreign Data Wrapper* dialog:
.. image:: images/foreign_data_wrapper_sql.png
:alt: Foreign data wrapper dialog sql tab
The example creates a foreign data wrapper named *libpq_debug* that uses pre-existing validator and handler functions, *dblink_fdw_validator* and *libpg_fdw_handler*. Selections on the *Options* tab set *debug* equal to *true*. The foreign data wrapper is owned by *postgres*.
* Click the *Help* button (?) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+19 -14
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _foreign_key_dialog:
**********************
The Foreign key Dialog
**********************
***************************
`Foreign key Dialog`:index:
***************************
Use the *Foreign key* dialog to specify the behavior of a foreign key constraint. A foreign key constraint maintains referential integrity between two tables. A foreign key constraint cannot be defined between a temporary table and a permanent table.
The *Foreign key* dialog organizes the development of a foreign key constraint through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Columns*, and *Action*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Foreign key* dialog organizes the development of a foreign key constraint through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Columns*, and *Action*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/foreign_key_general.png
:alt: Foreign key dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the foreign key constraint:
@@ -18,23 +19,25 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the foreign key constraint:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_key_definition.png
:alt: Foreign key dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the foreign key constraint:
* Move the *Deferrable?* switch to the *Yes* position to specify the timing of the constraint is deferrable and can be postponed until the end of the statement. The default is *No*.
* If enabled, move the *Deferred?* switch to the *Yes* position to specify the timing of the constraint is deferred to the end of the statement. The default is *No*.
* Move the *Match type* switch specify the type of matching that is enforced by the constraint:
* Move the *Match type* switch specify the type of matching that is enforced by the constraint:
* Select *Full* to indicate that all columns of a multicolumn foreign key must be null if any column is null; if all columns are null, the row is not required to have a match in the referenced table.
* Select *Full* to indicate that all columns of a multicolumn foreign key must be null if any column is null; if all columns are null, the row is not required to have a match in the referenced table.
* Select *Simple* to specify that a single foreign key column may be null; if any column is null, the row is not required to have a match in the referenced table.
* Move the *Validated* switch to the *Yes* position to instruct the server to validate the existing table content (against a foreign key or check constraint) when you save modifications to this dialog.
* Move the *Auto FK Index* switch to the *No* position to disable the automatic index feature.
* The field next to *Covering Index* generates the name of an index if the *Auto FK Index* switch is in the *Yes* position; or, this field is disabled.
* The field next to *Covering Index* generates the name of an index if the *Auto FK Index* switch is in the *Yes* position; or, this field is disabled.
Click the *Columns* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_key_columns.png
:alt: Foreign key dialog columns tab
Use the fields in the *Columns* tab to specify one or more reference column(s). A Foreign Key constraint requires that one or more columns of a table must only contain values that match values in the referenced column(s) of a row of a referenced table:
@@ -47,14 +50,15 @@ Click the *Add* icon (+) to add a column to the list; repeat the steps above and
Click the *Action* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_key_action.png
:alt: Foreign key dialog action tab
Use the drop-down listboxes on the *Action* tab to specify behavior related to the foreign key constraint that will be performed when data within the table is updated or deleted:
Use the drop-down listboxes on the *Action* tab to specify behavior related to the foreign key constraint that will be performed when data within the table is updated or deleted:
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *On update* to select an action that will be performed when data in the table is updated.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *On delete* to select an action that will be performed when data in the table is deleted.
The supported actions are:
+-------------+------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
| NO ACTION | Produce an error indicating that the deletion or update will create a foreign key constraint violation. |
| | If the constraint is deferred, this error will be produced at constraint check time if any referencing |
@@ -74,16 +78,17 @@ The supported actions are:
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Foreign key* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Foreign key* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Foreign key* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Foreign key* dialog:
.. image:: images/foreign_key_sql.png
:alt: Foreign key dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a foreign key constraint named *territory_fkey* that matches values in the *distributors* table *territory* column with those of the *sales_territories* table *region* column.
The example shown demonstrates creating a foreign key constraint named *territory_fkey* that matches values in the *distributors* table *territory* column with those of the *sales_territories* table *region* column.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+15 -10
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _foreign_server_dialog:
*************************
The Foreign Server Dialog
*************************
******************************
`Foreign Server Dialog`:index:
******************************
Use the *Foreign Server* dialog to create a foreign server. A foreign server typically encapsulates connection information that a foreign-data wrapper uses to access an external data resource. Each foreign data wrapper may connect to a different foreign server; in the *pgAdmin* tree control, expand the node of the applicable foreign data wrapper to launch the *Foreign Server* dialog.
The *Foreign Server* dialog organizes the development of a foreign server through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Options*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Foreign Server* dialog organizes the development of a foreign server through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Options*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/foreign_server_general.png
:alt: Foreign server dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the foreign server:
@@ -19,6 +20,7 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the foreign server:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_server_definition.png
:alt: Foreign server dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to set parameters:
@@ -28,23 +30,25 @@ Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to set parameters:
Click the *Options* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_server_options.png
:alt: Foreign server dialog options tab
Use the fields in the *Options* tab to specify options. Click the *Add* button to create an option clause for the foreign server.
Use the fields in the *Options* tab to specify options. Click the *Add* button to create an option clause for the foreign server.
* Specify the option name in the *Option* field.
* Provide a corresponding value in the *Value* field.
* Provide a corresponding value in the *Value* field.
Click *Add* to create each additional clause; to discard an option, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *Security* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_server_security.png
:alt: Foreign server dialog security tab
Use the *Security* tab to assign security privileges to the foreign server. Click *Add* before you assign a set of privileges.
* Select the name of the role from the drop-down listbox in the *Grantee* field.
* Click inside the *Privileges* field. Check the boxes to the left of one or more privileges to grant the selected privileges to the specified user.
* Select the name of the role from the drop-down listbox in the *Grantor* field. The default grantor is the owner of the foreign server. This is a required field.
* Select the name of the role from the drop-down listbox in the *Grantor* field. The default grantor is the owner of the foreign server. This is a required field.
Click *Add* to assign a new set of privileges; to discard a privilege, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* dialog.
@@ -54,13 +58,14 @@ Your entries in the *Foreign Server* dialog generate a SQL command (see an examp
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Foreign Server* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Foreign Server* dialog:
.. image:: images/foreign_server_sql.png
.. image:: images/foreign_server_sql.png
:alt: Foreign server dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a foreign server for the foreign data wrapper *hdfs_fdw*. It has the name *hdfs_server*; its type is *hiveserver2*. Options for the foreign server include a host and a port.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
* Click the *Reset* button to restore configuration parameters.
+20 -13
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _foreign_table_dialog:
************************
The Foreign Table Dialog
************************
*****************************
`Foreign Table Dialog`:index:
*****************************
Use the *Foreign Table* dialog to define a foreign table in the current database. Foreign tables define the structure of an external data source that resides on a foreign server.
The *Foreign Table* dialog organizes the development of a foreign table through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Columns*, *Constraints*, *Options*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Foreign Table* dialog organizes the development of a foreign table through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Columns*, *Constraints*, *Options*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/foreign_table_general.png
:alt: Foreign table dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the foreign table:
@@ -20,15 +21,17 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the foreign table:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_table_definition.png
:alt: Foreign table dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the external data source:
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Foreign server* to select a foreign server. This list is populated with servers defined through the *Foreign Server* dialog.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Inherits* to specify a parent table. The foreign table will inherit all of its columns. This field is optional.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Inherits* to specify a parent table. The foreign table will inherit all of its columns. This field is optional.
Click the *Columns* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_table_columns.png
:alt: Foreign table dialog columns tab
Use the fields in the *Columns* tab to to add columns and their attributes to the table. Click the *Add* icon (+) to define a column:
@@ -40,6 +43,7 @@ Click the *Add* icon (+) to specify each additional column; to discard a column,
Click the *Constraints* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_table_constraints.png
:alt: Foreign table dialog constraints tab
Use the fields in the *Constraints* tab to apply a table constraint to the foreign table. Click the *Add* icon (+) to define a constraint:
@@ -53,19 +57,21 @@ Click the *Add* icon (+) to specify each additional constraint; to discard a con
Click the *Options* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_table_options.png
:alt: Foreign table dialog options tab
Use the fields in the *Options* tab to specify options to be associated with the new foreign table or one of its columns; the accepted option names and values are specific to the foreign data wrapper associated with the foreign server. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add an option/value pair.
Use the fields in the *Options* tab to specify options to be associated with the new foreign table or one of its columns; the accepted option names and values are specific to the foreign data wrapper associated with the foreign server. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add an option/value pair.
* Specify the option name in the *Option* field. Duplicate option names are not allowed.
* Provide a corresponding value in the *Value* field.
* Provide a corresponding value in the *Value* field.
Click the *Add* icon (+) to specify each additional option/value pair; to discard an option, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *Security* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/foreign_table_security.png
:alt: Foreign table dialog security tab
Use the *Security* tab to assign privileges and define security labels.
Use the *Security* tab to assign privileges and define security labels.
Use the *Privileges* panel to assign privileges to a role. Click the *Add* icon (+) to set privileges for database objects:
@@ -75,26 +81,27 @@ Use the *Privileges* panel to assign privileges to a role. Click the *Add* icon
Click the *Add* icon (+) to assign additional privileges; to discard a privilege, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Use the *Security Labels* panel to define security labels applied to the function. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label selection:
Use the *Security Labels* panel to define security labels applied to the function. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label selection:
* Specify a security label provider in the *Provider* field. The named provider must be loaded and must consent to the proposed labeling operation.
* Specify a a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
* Specify a a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
Click the *Add* icon (+) to assign additional security labels; to discard a security label, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Foreign Table* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Foreign Table* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Foreign Table* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Foreign Table* dialog:
.. image:: images/foreign_table_sql.png
:alt: Foreign table dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a foreign table *weblogs* with multiple columns and two options.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+15 -11
View File
@@ -1,16 +1,17 @@
.. _fts_configuration_dialog:
****************************
The FTS Configuration dialog
****************************
*********************************
`FTS Configuration dialog`:index:
*********************************
Use the *FTS Configuration* dialog to configure a full text search. A text search configuration specifies a text search parser that can divide a string into tokens, along with dictionaries that can identify searchable tokens.
The *FTS Configuration* dialog organizes the development of a FTS configuration through the following dialog tabs: "*General*, *Definition*, and *Tokens*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *FTS Configuration* dialog organizes the development of a FTS configuration through the following dialog tabs: "*General*, *Definition*, and *Tokens*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
Click the *General* tab to begin.
.. image:: images/fts_configuration_general.png
:alt: FTS configuration dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify a FTS configuration:
@@ -22,6 +23,7 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify a FTS configuration:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/fts_configuration_definition.png
:alt: FTS configuration dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define parameters:
@@ -31,27 +33,29 @@ Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define parameters:
Click the *Tokens* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/fts_configuration_tokens.png
:alt: FTS configuration dialog tokens tab
Use the fields in the *Tokens* tab to add a token:
* Use the *Tokens* field to specify the name of a token.
* Click the *Add* icon (+) to create a token.
* Use the *Dictionaries* field to specify a dictionary.
* Use the *Dictionaries* field to specify a dictionary.
Repeat these steps to add additional tokens; to discard a token, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *FTS Configuration* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *FTS Configuration* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *FTS Configuration* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *FTS Configuration* dialog:
.. image:: images/fts_configuration_sql.png
:alt: FTS configuration dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a FTS configuration named *meme_phrases*. It uses the *default* parser.
The example shown demonstrates creating a FTS configuration named *meme_phrases*. It uses the *default* parser.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+17 -13
View File
@@ -1,15 +1,16 @@
.. _fts_dictionary_dialog:
*************************
The FTS Dictionary Dialog
*************************
******************************
`FTS Dictionary Dialog`:index:
******************************
Use the *FTS Dictionary* dialog to create a full text search dictionary. You can use a predefined templates or create a new dictionary with custom parameters.
Use the *FTS Dictionary* dialog to create a full text search dictionary. You can use a predefined templates or create a new dictionary with custom parameters.
The *FTS Dictionary* dialog organizes the development of a FTS dictionary through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, and *Options*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *FTS Dictionary* dialog organizes the development of a FTS dictionary through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, and *Options*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/fts_dictionary_general.png
:alt: FTS dictionary dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the dictionary:
* Use the *Name* field to add a descriptive name for the dictionary. The name will be displayed in the *pgAdmin* tree control.
@@ -20,7 +21,8 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify the dictionary:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/fts_dictionary_definition.png
:alt: FTS dictionary dialog definition tab
Use the field in the *Definition* tab to choose a template from the drop-down listbox:
*Select *ispell* to select the Ispell template. The Ispell dictionary template supports morphological dictionaries, which can normalize many different linguistic forms of a word into the same lexeme. For example, an English Ispell dictionary can match all declensions and conjugations of the search term bank, e.g., banking, banked, banks, banks', and bank's. Ispell dictionaries usually recognize a limited set of words, so they should be followed by another broader dictionary; for example, a Snowball dictionary, which recognizes everything.
@@ -32,7 +34,8 @@ Use the field in the *Definition* tab to choose a template from the drop-down li
Click the *Options* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/fts_dictionary_options.png
:alt: FTS dictionary dialog options tab
Use the fields in the *Options* tab to provide template-specific options. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add an option clause:
* Specify the name of an option in the *Option* field
@@ -41,17 +44,18 @@ Use the fields in the *Options* tab to provide template-specific options. Click
Click the *Add* icon (+) to specify each additional option/value pair; to discard an option, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *FTS Dictionary* dialog generate a generate a SQL command. Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *FTS Dictionary* dialog generate a generate a SQL command. Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *FTS Dictionary* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *FTS Dictionary* dialog:
.. image:: images/fts_dictionary_sql.png
:alt: FTS dictionary dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a custom dictionary named *more_stopwords* which is based on the simple template and is configured to use standard English.
The example shown demonstrates creating a custom dictionary named *more_stopwords* which is based on the simple template and is configured to use standard English.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+10 -7
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _fts_parser_dialog:
*********************
The FTS Parser Dialog
*********************
**************************
`FTS Parser Dialog`:index:
**************************
Use the *FTS Parser* dialog to create a new text search parser. A text search parser defines a method for splitting a text string into tokens and assigning types (categories) to the tokens.
Use the *FTS Parser* dialog to create a new text search parser. A text search parser defines a method for splitting a text string into tokens and assigning types (categories) to the tokens.
The *FTS Parser* dialog organizes the development of a text search parser through the following dialog tabs: *General*, and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *FTS Parser* dialog organizes the development of a text search parser through the following dialog tabs: *General*, and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/fts_parser_general.png
:alt: FTS parser dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify a text search parser:
@@ -19,6 +20,7 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify a text search parser:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/fts_parser_definition.png
:alt: FTS parser dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define parameters:
@@ -31,9 +33,10 @@ Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define parameters:
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/fts_parser_sql.png
:alt: FTS parser dialog sql tab
Your entries in the *FTS Parser* dialog generate a generate a SQL command. Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *FTS Parser* dialog generate a generate a SQL command. Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+11 -8
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _fts_template_dialog:
***********************
The FTS Template Dialog
***********************
****************************
`FTS Template Dialog`:index:
****************************
Use the *FTS Template* dialog to create a new text search template. A text search template defines the functions that implement text search dictionaries.
Use the *FTS Template* dialog to create a new text search template. A text search template defines the functions that implement text search dictionaries.
The *FTS Template* dialog organizes the development of a text search Template through the following dialog tabs: *General*, and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *FTS Template* dialog organizes the development of a text search Template through the following dialog tabs: *General*, and *Definition*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/fts_template_general.png
:alt: FTS template dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify a template:
@@ -19,6 +20,7 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify a template:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/fts_template_definition.png
:alt: FTS template dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define function parameters:
@@ -31,12 +33,13 @@ Your entries in the *FTS Template* dialog generate a SQL command (see an example
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *FTS Template* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *FTS Template* dialog:
.. image:: images/fts_template_sql.png
:alt: FTS template dialog sql tab
The example shown demonstrates creating a fts template named *ru_template* that uses the ispell dictionary.
The example shown demonstrates creating a fts template named *ru_template* that uses the ispell dictionary.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help. View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+27 -20
View File
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
.. _function_dialog:
*******************
The Function Dialog
*******************
************************
`Function Dialog`:index:
************************
Use the *Function* dialog to define a function. If you drop and then recreate a function, the new function is not the same entity as the old; you must drop existing rules, views, triggers, etc. that refer to the old function.
Use the *Function* dialog to define a function. If you drop and then recreate a function, the new function is not the same entity as the old; you must drop existing rules, views, triggers, etc. that refer to the old function.
The *Function* dialog organizes the development of a function through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Options*, *Arguments*, *Parameters*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
The *Function* dialog organizes the development of a function through the following dialog tabs: *General*, *Definition*, *Options*, *Arguments*, *Parameters*, and *Security*. The *SQL* tab displays the SQL code generated by dialog selections.
.. image:: images/function_general.png
:alt: Function dialog general tab
Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify a function:
@@ -20,39 +21,42 @@ Use the fields in the *General* tab to identify a function:
Click the *Definition* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/function_definition.png
:alt: Function dialog definition tab
Use the fields in the *Definition* tab to define the function:
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Return type* to select the data type returned by the function, if any.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Return type* to select the data type returned by the function, if any.
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Language* to select the implementation language. The default is *sql*.
* Use the *Code* field to write the code that will execute when the function is called.
Click the *Options* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/function_options.png
:alt: Function dialog options tab
Use the fields in the *Options* tab to describe or modify the action of the function:
* Use the drop-down listbox next to *Volatility* to select one of the following. *VOLATILE* is the default value.
* *VOLATILE* indicates that the function value can change even within a single table scan, so no optimizations can be made.
* *VOLATILE* indicates that the function value can change even within a single table scan, so no optimizations can be made.
* *STABLE* indicates that the function cannot modify the database, and that within a single table scan it will consistently return the same result for the same argument values.
* *IMMUTABLE* indicates that the function cannot modify the database and always returns the same result when given the same argument values.
* Move the *Returns a Set?* switch to indicate if the function returns a set that includes multiple rows. The default is *No*.
* Move the *Returns a Set?* switch to indicate if the function returns a set that includes multiple rows. The default is *No*.
* Move the *Strict?* switch to indicate if the function always returns NULL whenever any of its arguments are NULL. If *Yes*, the function is not executed when there are NULL arguments; instead a NULL result is assumed automatically. The default is *No*.
* Move the *Security of definer?* switch to specify that the function is to be executed with the privileges of the user that created it. The default is *No*.
* Move the *Window?* switch to indicate that the function is a window function rather than a plain function. The default is *No*. This is currently only useful for functions written in C. The WINDOW attribute cannot be changed when replacing an existing function definition. For more information about the CREATE FUNCTION command, see the PostgreSQL core documentation available at:
http://www.postgresql.org/docs/9.5/static/functions-window.html
* Use the *Estimated cost* field to specify a positive number representing the estimated execution cost for the function, in units of cpu_operator_cost. If the function returns a set, this is the cost per returned row.
* Use the *Estimated rows* field to specify a positive number giving the estimated number of rows that the query planner should expect the function to return. This is only allowed when the function is declared to return a set. The default assumption is 1000 rows.
* Use the *Estimated cost* field to specify a positive number representing the estimated execution cost for the function, in units of cpu_operator_cost. If the function returns a set, this is the cost per returned row.
* Use the *Estimated rows* field to specify a positive number giving the estimated number of rows that the query planner should expect the function to return. This is only allowed when the function is declared to return a set. The default assumption is 1000 rows.
* Move the *Leak proof?* switch to indicate whether the function has side effects. The default is *No*. This option can only be set by the superuser.
Click the *Arguments* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/function_arguments.png
:alt: Function dialog arguments tab
Use the fields in the *Arguments* tab to define an argument. Click the *Add* icon (+) to set parameters and values for the argument:
@@ -66,19 +70,21 @@ Click the *Add* icon (+) to define another argument; to discard an argument, cli
Click the *Parameters* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/function_parameters.png
:alt: Function dialog parameters tab
Use the fields in the *Parameters* tab to specify settings that will be applied when the function is invoked. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add a *Name*/*Value* field in the table.
* Use the drop-down listbox in the *Name* column in the *Parameters* panel to select a parameter.
* Use the drop-down listbox in the *Name* column in the *Parameters* panel to select a parameter.
* Use the *Value* field to specify the value that will be associated with the selected variable. This field is context-sensitive.
Click the *Security* tab to continue.
.. image:: images/function_security.png
:alt: Function dialog security tab
Use the *Security* tab to assign privileges and define security labels.
Use the *Security* tab to assign privileges and define security labels.
Use the *Privileges* panel to assign usage privileges for the function to a role.
Use the *Privileges* panel to assign usage privileges for the function to a role.
* Select the name of the role from the drop-down listbox in the *Grantee* field.
* Click inside the *Privileges* field. Check the boxes to the left of one or more privileges to grant the selected privilege to the specified user.
@@ -86,25 +92,26 @@ Use the *Privileges* panel to assign usage privileges for the function to a role
Click the *Add* icon (+) to assign additional privileges; to discard a privilege, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Use the *Security Labels* panel to define security labels applied to the function. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label selection:
Use the *Security Labels* panel to define security labels applied to the function. Click the *Add* icon (+) to add each security label selection:
* Specify a security label provider in the *Provider* field. The named provider must be loaded and must consent to the proposed labeling operation.
* Specify a a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
* Specify a a security label in the *Security Label* field. The meaning of a given label is at the discretion of the label provider. PostgreSQL places no restrictions on whether or how a label provider must interpret security labels; it merely provides a mechanism for storing them.
Click the *Add* icon (+) to assign additional security labels; to discard a security label, click the trash icon to the left of the row and confirm deletion in the *Delete Row* popup.
Click the *SQL* tab to continue.
Your entries in the *Function* dialog generate a generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
Your entries in the *Function* dialog generate a generate a SQL command (see an example below). Use the *SQL* tab for review; revisit or switch tabs to make any changes to the SQL command.
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by selections made in the *Function* dialog:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by selections made in the *Function* dialog:
.. image:: images/function_sql.png
:alt: Function dialog sql tab
The example demonstrates creating an *edbspl* function named *emp_comp*. The function adds two columns (p_sal and p_comm), and then uses the result to compute a yearly salary, returning a NUMERIC value.
* Click the *Info* button (i) to access online help.View context-sensitive help in the *Tabbed browser*, where a new tab displays the PostgreSQL core documentation.
* Click the *Save* button to save work.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
+50 -21
View File
@@ -1,13 +1,22 @@
.. _getting_started:
***************
Getting Started
***************
************************
`Getting Started`:index:
************************
Pre-compiled and configured installation packages for pgAdmin 4 are available for a number of desktop environments; we recommend using an installer whenever possible. A standard installation using the pgAdmin installer is a server deployment.
Pre-compiled and configured installation packages for pgAdmin 4 are available
for a number of desktop environments; we recommend using an installer
whenever possible.
In a Server Deployment, the pgAdmin application is deployed behind a webserver or with the WSGI interface.
If you install pgAdmin in server mode, you will be prompted to provide a role name and pgAdmin password when you initially connect to pgAdmin. The first role registered with pgAdmin will be an administrative user; the administrative role can use the pgAdmin *User Management* dialog to create and manage additional pgAdmin user accounts. When a user authenticates with pgAdmin, the pgAdmin tree control displays the server definitions associated with that login role.
In a Server Deployment, the pgAdmin application is deployed behind a webserver
or with the WSGI interface.
If you install pgAdmin in server mode, you will be prompted to provide a role
name and pgAdmin password when you initially connect to pgAdmin. The first
role registered with pgAdmin will be an administrative user; the
administrative role can use the pgAdmin *User Management* dialog to create
and manage additional pgAdmin user accounts. When a user authenticates
with pgAdmin, the pgAdmin tree control displays the server definitions
associated with that login role.
Contents:
@@ -15,26 +24,49 @@ Contents:
server_deployment
pgadmin_login
pgadmin_user
pgadmin_user
change_user_password
In a Desktop Deployment, the pgAdmin application is configured to use the desktop runtime environment to host and display the program on a supported platform. Typically, users will install a pre-built package to run pgAdmin in desktop mode, but a manual desktop deployment can be installed and though it is more difficult to setup, it may be useful for developers interested in understanding how pgAdmin works.
In a Desktop Deployment, the pgAdmin application is configured to use the
desktop runtime environment to host the program on a supported platform.
Typically, users will install a pre-built package to run pgAdmin in desktop
mode, but a manual desktop deployment can be installed and though it is more
difficult to setup, it may be useful for developers interested in understanding
how pgAdmin works.
Contents:
.. toctree::
:maxdepth: 2
desktop_deployment
The pgAdmin 4 client features a highly-customizable display that features drag-and-drop panels that you can arrange to make the best use of your desktop environment.
.. note:: Pre-compiled and configured installation packages are available for
a number of platforms. These packages should be used by end-users whereever
possible - the following information is useful for the maintainers of those
packages and users interested in understanding how pgAdmin works.
The tree control provides an elegant overview of the managed servers, and the objects that reside on each server. Right-click on a node within the tree control to access context-sensitive menus that provide quick access to management tasks for the selected object.
The pgAdmin 4 client features a highly-customizable display that features
drag-and-drop panels that you can arrange to make the best use of your desktop
environment.
The tabbed browser provide quick access to statistical information about each object in the tree control, and pgAdmin tools and utilities (such as the Query tool and the debugger). pgAdmin opens additional feature tabs each time you access the extended functionality offered by pgAdmin tools; you can open, close, and re-arrange feature tabs as needed.
The tree control provides an elegant overview of the managed servers, and the
objects that reside on each server. Right-click on a node within the tree control
to access context-sensitive menus that provide quick access to management tasks
for the selected object.
Use the *Preferences* dialog to customize the content and colors of the pgAdmin display. To open the *Preferences* dialog, select *Preferences* from the *File* menu.
The tabbed browser provide quick access to statistical information about each
object in the tree control, and pgAdmin tools and utilities (such as the Query
tool and the debugger). pgAdmin opens additional feature tabs each time you
access the extended functionality offered by pgAdmin tools; you can open, close,
and re-arrange feature tabs as needed.
*Help* buttons in the lower-left corner of each dialog will open the online help for the dialog. You can access additional Postgres help by navigating through the *Help* menu, and selecting the name of the resource that you wish to open.
Use the *Preferences* dialog to customize the content and behaviour of the pgAdmin
display. To open the *Preferences* dialog, select *Preferences* from the *File* menu.
*Help* buttons in the lower-left corner of each dialog will open the online help
for the dialog. You can access additional Postgres help by navigating through
the *Help* menu, and selecting the name of the resource that you wish to open.
Contents:
@@ -42,15 +74,12 @@ Contents:
browser
pgadmin_menu_bar
pgadmin_toolbar
pgadmin_tabbed_browser
pgadmin_tree_control
preferences
keyboard_shortcuts
Before using pgAdmin to manage objects that reside on a server, you must define a connection to the server; for more information please see *Connecting to a Server*:
Contents:
.. toctree::
connecting
Before using pgAdmin to manage objects that reside on a server, you must define a
connection to the server; for more information please see *Connecting to a Server*
in the next section.
+14 -11
View File
@@ -1,28 +1,30 @@
.. _grant_wizard:
************
Grant Wizard
************
*********************
`Grant Wizard`:index:
*********************
The *Grant Wizard* tool is a graphical interface that allows you to manage the privileges of one or more database objects in a point-and-click environment. A search box, dropdown lists, and checkboxes facilitate quick selections of database objects, roles and privileges.
The *Grant Wizard* tool is a graphical interface that allows you to manage the privileges of one or more database objects in a point-and-click environment. A search box, dropdown lists, and checkboxes facilitate quick selections of database objects, roles and privileges.
The wizard organizes privilege management through a sequence of windows: *Object Selection (step 1 of 3)*, *Privileges Selection (step 2 of 3)* and *Final (Review Selection) (step 3 of 3)*. The *Final (Review Selection)* window displays the SQL code generated by wizard selections.
The wizard organizes privilege management through a sequence of windows: *Object Selection (step 1 of 3)*, *Privileges Selection (step 2 of 3)* and *Final (Review Selection) (step 3 of 3)*. The *Final (Review Selection)* window displays the SQL code generated by wizard selections.
To launch the *Grant Wizard* tool, select a database object in the *pgAdmin* tree control, then navigate through *Tools* on the menu bar to click on the *Grant Wizard* option.
.. image:: images/grant_wizard_step1.png
:alt: Grant wizard step one page
Use the fields in the *Object Selection (step 1 of 3)* window to select the object or objects on which you are modifying privileges. Use the *Search by object type or name* field to locate a database object, or use the scrollbar to scroll through the list of all accessible objects.
Use the fields in the *Object Selection (step 1 of 3)* window to select the object or objects on which you are modifying privileges. Use the *Search by object type or name* field to locate a database object, or use the scrollbar to scroll through the list of all accessible objects.
* Each row in the table lists object identifiers; check the checkbox in the left column to include an object as a target of the Grant Wizard. The table displays:
* Each row in the table lists object identifiers; check the checkbox in the left column to include an object as a target of the Grant Wizard. The table displays:
* The object type in the *Object Type* field
* The schema in which the object resides in the *Schema* field
* The object name in the *Name* field.
* The object name in the *Name* field.
Click the *Next* button to continue, or the *Cancel* button to close the wizard without modifying privileges.
.. image:: images/grant_wizard_step2.png
:alt: Grant wizard step two page
Use the fields in the *Privileges Selection (step 2 of 3)* window to grant privileges. If you grant a privilege WITH GRANT OPTION, the Grantee will have the right to grant privileges on the object to others. If WITH GRANT OPTION is subsequently revoked, any role who received access to that object from that Grantee (directly or through a chain of grants) will lose thier privileges on the object.
@@ -40,12 +42,13 @@ Your entries in the *Grant Wizard* tool generate a SQL command; you can review t
**Example**
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Grant Wizard* tool:
The following is an example of the sql command generated by user selections in the *Grant Wizard* tool:
.. image:: images/grant_wizard_step3.png
:alt: Grant wizard step three page
The commands displayed assign a role named *Bob* *INSERT* and *UPDATE* privileges *WITH GRANT OPTION* on the *sales_meetings* and the *sales_territories* tables.
* Click the *Back* button to select or deselect additional database objects, roles and privileges.
* Click the *Back* button to select or deselect additional database objects, roles and privileges.
* Click the *Cancel* button to exit without saving work.
* Click the *Finish* button to save selections and exit the wizard.
BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 38 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 56 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 27 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 15 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 28 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 26 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 37 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 36 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 46 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 44 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 49 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 58 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 33 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 44 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 281 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 299 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 36 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 46 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 44 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 48 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 33 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 32 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 138 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 166 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 40 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 50 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 29 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 29 KiB

Binary file not shown.

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 25 KiB

Binary file not shown.

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 35 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 51 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 35 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 32 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 39 KiB

Binary file not shown.

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 48 KiB

Binary file not shown.

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 28 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 274 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 184 KiB

Binary file not shown.

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 39 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 65 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 39 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 38 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 22 KiB

Regular → Executable
BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 52 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 28 KiB

Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 51 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 60 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 47 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 68 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 54 KiB

Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 98 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 57 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 41 KiB

Regular → Executable
BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 16 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 13 KiB

Binary file not shown.

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 31 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 45 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 30 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 34 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 24 KiB

Regular → Executable
BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 87 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 35 KiB

Binary file not shown.

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 22 KiB

Binary file not shown.

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 22 KiB

BIN
View File
Binary file not shown.

Before

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 52 KiB

After

Width:  |  Height:  |  Size: 31 KiB

Loaded 100 of 2256 files, more files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff. Show more